1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */ 2 /* 3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface 4 * 5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc. 6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz> 7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH 9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH 10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2020 Intel Corporation 11 */ 12 13 #ifndef MAC80211_H 14 #define MAC80211_H 15 16 #include <linux/bug.h> 17 #include <linux/kernel.h> 18 #include <linux/if_ether.h> 19 #include <linux/skbuff.h> 20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h> 21 #include <net/cfg80211.h> 22 #include <net/codel.h> 23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h> 24 #include <asm/unaligned.h> 25 26 /** 27 * DOC: Introduction 28 * 29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements 30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document 31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware 32 * drivers. 33 */ 34 35 /** 36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts 37 * 38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be 39 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any 40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such 41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the 42 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even 43 * tasklet function. 44 * 45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also 46 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions! 47 */ 48 49 /** 50 * DOC: Warning 51 * 52 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will 53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet. 54 */ 55 56 /** 57 * DOC: Frame format 58 * 59 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver, 60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are 61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the 62 * hardware. 63 * 64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features: 65 * 66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload 67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware. 68 * 69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to 70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU. 71 */ 72 73 /** 74 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue 75 * 76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use. 77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by 78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the 79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback. 80 * 81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during 82 * suspend. 83 * 84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock. 85 * 86 */ 87 88 /** 89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing 90 * 91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed 92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness 93 * between different stations/interfaces. 94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead 95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx(). 96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx(). 97 * 98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue 99 * driver operation. 100 * 101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with 102 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and 103 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames. 104 * 105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations 106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops. 107 * 108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a 109 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a 110 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op. 111 * 112 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to 113 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to 114 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls 115 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using 116 * ieee80211_return_txq(). 117 * 118 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has 119 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling 120 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq 121 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls 122 * .release_buffered_frames(). 123 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own 124 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained 125 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue). 126 */ 127 128 struct device; 129 130 /** 131 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues 132 * 133 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues. 134 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set 135 */ 136 enum ieee80211_max_queues { 137 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16, 138 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1, 139 }; 140 141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff 142 143 /** 144 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211 145 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice 146 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video 147 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort 148 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background 149 */ 150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers { 151 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0, 152 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1, 153 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2, 154 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3, 155 }; 156 157 /** 158 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration 159 * 160 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS 161 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29. 162 * 163 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255] 164 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form 165 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767] 166 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min] 167 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled 168 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category 169 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue 170 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured 171 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE 172 */ 173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params { 174 u16 txop; 175 u16 cw_min; 176 u16 cw_max; 177 u8 aifs; 178 bool acm; 179 bool uapsd; 180 bool mu_edca; 181 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec; 182 }; 183 184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats { 185 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount; 186 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount; 187 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount; 188 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount; 189 }; 190 191 /** 192 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context 193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed 194 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed 195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed 196 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel, 197 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA 198 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed 199 */ 200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change { 201 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0), 202 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1), 203 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2), 204 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3), 205 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4), 206 }; 207 208 /** 209 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to 210 * 211 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx 212 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only. 213 * 214 * @def: the channel definition 215 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required. 216 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be 217 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions 218 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled 219 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions; 220 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static. 221 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel. 222 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 223 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information. 224 */ 225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf { 226 struct cfg80211_chan_def def; 227 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def; 228 229 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic; 230 231 bool radar_enabled; 232 233 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 234 }; 235 236 /** 237 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode 238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already 239 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface 240 * needs to be switched from one to the other. 241 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop 242 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but 243 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches 244 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course 245 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing 246 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context 247 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used 248 * for changes/removal.) 249 */ 250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode { 251 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF, 252 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS, 253 }; 254 255 /** 256 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information 257 * 258 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that 259 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The 260 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be 261 * done. 262 * 263 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx 264 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned 265 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned 266 */ 267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch { 268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 269 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx; 270 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx; 271 }; 272 273 /** 274 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags 275 * 276 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback 277 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed. 278 * 279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated), 280 * also implies a change in the AID. 281 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed 282 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed 283 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed 284 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed 285 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed 286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed 287 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever 288 * reason (IBSS and managed mode) 289 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve 290 * new beacon (beaconing modes) 291 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be 292 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes) 293 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed 294 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed 295 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed. 296 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note 297 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode. 298 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface. 299 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode) 300 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode) 301 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode) 302 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface 303 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS) 304 * changed 305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available: 306 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration. 307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed, 308 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel 309 * context had been assigned. 310 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed 311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed 312 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected 313 * keep alive) changed. 314 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface 315 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder 316 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode). 317 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed 318 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed. 319 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed 320 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed. 321 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 322 * status changed. 323 * 324 */ 325 enum ieee80211_bss_change { 326 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0, 327 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1, 328 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2, 329 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3, 330 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4, 331 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5, 332 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6, 333 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7, 334 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8, 335 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9, 336 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10, 337 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11, 338 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12, 339 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13, 340 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14, 341 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15, 342 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16, 343 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17, 344 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18, 345 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19, 346 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20, 347 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21, 348 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22, 349 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23, 350 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24, 351 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25, 352 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26, 353 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27, 354 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28, 355 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29, 356 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30, 357 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31, 358 359 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */ 360 }; 361 362 /* 363 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number 364 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP 365 * filtering will be disabled. 366 */ 367 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4 368 369 /** 370 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver 371 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver. 372 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME 373 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received 374 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because 375 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only 376 * once each time the timeout triggers. 377 */ 378 enum ieee80211_event_type { 379 RSSI_EVENT, 380 MLME_EVENT, 381 BAR_RX_EVENT, 382 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT, 383 }; 384 385 /** 386 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT 387 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver. 388 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver. 389 */ 390 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data { 391 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH, 392 RSSI_EVENT_LOW, 393 }; 394 395 /** 396 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT 397 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data 398 */ 399 struct ieee80211_rssi_event { 400 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data; 401 }; 402 403 /** 404 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 405 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication 406 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association 407 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received.. 408 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent. 409 */ 410 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data { 411 AUTH_EVENT, 412 ASSOC_EVENT, 413 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT, 414 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT, 415 }; 416 417 /** 418 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 419 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully. 420 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer. 421 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out. 422 */ 423 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status { 424 MLME_SUCCESS, 425 MLME_DENIED, 426 MLME_TIMEOUT, 427 }; 428 429 /** 430 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT 431 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data 432 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status 433 * @reason: the reason code if applicable 434 */ 435 struct ieee80211_mlme_event { 436 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data; 437 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status; 438 u16 reason; 439 }; 440 441 /** 442 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events 443 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates 444 * @tid: the tid 445 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT) 446 */ 447 struct ieee80211_ba_event { 448 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 449 u16 tid; 450 u16 ssn; 451 }; 452 453 /** 454 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver 455 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type. 456 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT 457 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT 458 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT 459 * @u:union holding the fields above 460 */ 461 struct ieee80211_event { 462 enum ieee80211_event_type type; 463 union { 464 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi; 465 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme; 466 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba; 467 } u; 468 }; 469 470 /** 471 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data 472 * 473 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO 474 * 475 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 476 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 477 */ 478 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data { 479 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN]; 480 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN]; 481 }; 482 483 /** 484 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters 485 * 486 * @lci: LCI subelement content 487 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content 488 * @lci_len: LCI data length 489 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length 490 */ 491 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params { 492 const u8 *lci; 493 const u8 *civicloc; 494 size_t lci_len; 495 size_t civicloc_len; 496 }; 497 498 /** 499 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from 500 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail. 501 * 502 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 503 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 504 */ 505 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery { 506 u32 min_interval; 507 u32 max_interval; 508 }; 509 510 /** 511 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters 512 * 513 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association 514 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS. 515 * 516 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE 517 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK 518 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP 519 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either 520 * ACK, BACK or both 521 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field 522 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us 523 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE 524 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 525 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 526 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 527 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 528 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames 529 * @assoc: association status 530 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS 531 * or not 532 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created 533 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true 534 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection 535 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble 536 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP) 537 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing, 538 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified 539 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then. 540 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old 541 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the 542 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can 543 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after 544 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the 545 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 546 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf, 547 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation 548 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 549 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY 550 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts. 551 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync 552 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently 553 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks. 554 * @beacon_int: beacon interval 555 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp 556 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an 557 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in 558 * the current band. 559 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate 560 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled) 561 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS 562 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not 563 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be 564 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example. 565 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data 566 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation. 567 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel. 568 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must 569 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT. 570 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value 571 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should 572 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in 573 * relation to the newly configured threshold. 574 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value 575 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single 576 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it. 577 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold. 578 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis 579 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The 580 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here. 581 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here 582 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass. 583 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this 584 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list 585 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case. 586 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS. 587 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the 588 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what 589 * your driver/device needs to do. 590 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by 591 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations. 592 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode. 593 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid. 594 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode. 595 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured. 596 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit 597 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular 598 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is 599 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from 600 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to 601 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace) 602 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave 603 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed 604 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS 605 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support. 606 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from 607 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated. 608 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include 609 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element. 610 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN 611 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the 612 * station. 613 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM 614 * responder functionality. 615 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder. 616 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile 617 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP 618 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set 619 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set 620 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of 621 * nontransmitted BSSIDs 622 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received 623 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set. 624 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are 625 * connected to (STA) 626 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters. 627 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE 628 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration 629 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 630 * interval. 631 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format). 632 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed 633 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware. 634 */ 635 struct ieee80211_bss_conf { 636 const u8 *bssid; 637 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext; 638 bool uora_exists; 639 u8 uora_ocw_range; 640 u16 frame_time_rts_th; 641 bool he_support; 642 bool twt_requester; 643 bool twt_responder; 644 bool twt_protected; 645 /* association related data */ 646 bool assoc, ibss_joined; 647 bool ibss_creator; 648 u16 aid; 649 /* erp related data */ 650 bool use_cts_prot; 651 bool use_short_preamble; 652 bool use_short_slot; 653 bool enable_beacon; 654 u8 dtim_period; 655 u16 beacon_int; 656 u16 assoc_capability; 657 u64 sync_tsf; 658 u32 sync_device_ts; 659 u8 sync_dtim_count; 660 u32 basic_rates; 661 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate; 662 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 663 u16 ht_operation_mode; 664 s32 cqm_rssi_thold; 665 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst; 666 s32 cqm_rssi_low; 667 s32 cqm_rssi_high; 668 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 669 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group; 670 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN]; 671 int arp_addr_cnt; 672 bool qos; 673 bool idle; 674 bool ps; 675 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN]; 676 size_t ssid_len; 677 bool hidden_ssid; 678 int txpower; 679 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type; 680 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr; 681 bool allow_p2p_go_ps; 682 u16 max_idle_period; 683 bool protected_keep_alive; 684 bool ftm_responder; 685 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params; 686 /* Multiple BSSID data */ 687 bool nontransmitted; 688 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN]; 689 u8 bssid_index; 690 u8 bssid_indicator; 691 bool ema_ap; 692 u8 profile_periodicity; 693 struct { 694 u32 params; 695 u16 nss_set; 696 } he_oper; 697 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd; 698 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color; 699 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery; 700 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval; 701 bool s1g; 702 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate; 703 }; 704 705 /** 706 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status 707 * 708 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info. 709 * 710 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame. 711 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence 712 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment 713 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the 714 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly 715 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly 716 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from 717 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing. 718 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to 719 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE 720 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for 721 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field. 722 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack 723 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination 724 * station 725 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame 726 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon 727 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU 728 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211. 729 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted 730 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to 731 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or 732 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station 733 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on 734 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for 735 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above), 736 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the 737 * hardware queue. 738 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged 739 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status 740 * is for the whole aggregation. 741 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned, 742 * so consider using block ack request (BAR). 743 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be 744 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will 745 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment) 746 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate 747 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for 748 * off-channel operation. 749 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation 750 * (header conversion) 751 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211, 752 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS 753 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211, 754 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted 755 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll 756 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must 757 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode. 758 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the 759 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used 760 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the 761 * queue gets full. 762 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted 763 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not 764 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.) 765 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME 766 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status 767 * should kick the MLME state machine. 768 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211 769 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX 770 * status to user space) 771 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame 772 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this 773 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use. 774 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on 775 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done 776 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be 777 * handled properly by the device. 778 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP 779 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow 780 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested. 781 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate. 782 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P 783 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band. 784 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period, 785 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in 786 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames 787 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for 788 * PS-Poll responses. 789 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate. 790 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when 791 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose. 792 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it 793 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for 794 * monitor injection). 795 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with 796 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without 797 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW). 798 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack 799 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK. 800 * 801 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't 802 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary. 803 */ 804 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags { 805 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0), 806 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1), 807 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2), 808 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3), 809 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4), 810 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5), 811 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6), 812 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7), 813 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8), 814 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9), 815 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10), 816 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11), 817 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12), 818 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13), 819 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14), 820 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15), 821 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16), 822 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17), 823 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18), 824 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19), 825 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20), 826 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21), 827 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22), 828 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24), 829 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25), 830 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26), 831 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27), 832 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28), 833 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29), 834 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30), 835 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31), 836 }; 837 838 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23 839 840 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS 841 842 /** 843 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control 844 * 845 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control 846 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP) 847 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll 848 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD). 849 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information 850 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame 851 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path 852 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup 853 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211, 854 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before 855 * it can be sent out. 856 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that 857 * has already been assigned to this frame. 858 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered 859 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent 860 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values. 861 * 862 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags. 863 */ 864 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags { 865 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0), 866 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1), 867 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2), 868 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3), 869 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4), 870 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5), 871 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6), 872 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7), 873 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8), 874 }; 875 876 /* 877 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are 878 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack. 879 */ 880 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \ 881 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \ 882 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \ 883 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \ 884 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \ 885 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \ 886 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \ 887 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 888 889 /** 890 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the 891 * Rate Control algorithm. 892 * 893 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx, 894 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate. 895 * 896 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate. 897 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required. 898 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection. 899 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble. 900 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate. 901 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split 902 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number) 903 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in 904 * Greenfield mode. 905 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz. 906 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission 907 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission 908 * (80+80 isn't supported yet) 909 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the 910 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is 911 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS. 912 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate. 913 */ 914 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags { 915 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0), 916 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1), 917 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2), 918 919 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */ 920 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3), 921 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4), 922 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5), 923 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6), 924 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7), 925 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8), 926 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9), 927 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10), 928 }; 929 930 931 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */ 932 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40 933 934 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */ 935 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24 936 937 /* maximum number of rate stages */ 938 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4 939 940 /* maximum number of rate table entries */ 941 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4 942 943 /** 944 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status 945 * 946 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with 947 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags) 948 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate 949 * 950 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used 951 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried. 952 * 953 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should 954 * always report the rate along with the flags it used. 955 * 956 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs 957 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate 958 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example, 959 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the 960 * information:: 961 * 962 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 } 963 * 964 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted 965 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four 966 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets 967 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status 968 * information should then contain:: 969 * 970 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ... 971 * 972 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2 973 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement. 974 */ 975 struct ieee80211_tx_rate { 976 s8 idx; 977 u16 count:5, 978 flags:11; 979 } __packed; 980 981 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31 982 983 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate, 984 u8 mcs, u8 nss) 985 { 986 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF); 987 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7); 988 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs; 989 } 990 991 static inline u8 992 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 993 { 994 return rate->idx & 0xF; 995 } 996 997 static inline u8 998 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 999 { 1000 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1; 1001 } 1002 1003 /** 1004 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information 1005 * 1006 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses: 1007 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do 1008 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable) 1009 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened 1010 * 1011 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above 1012 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races) 1013 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC 1014 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally 1015 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally 1016 * @control: union part for control data 1017 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try 1018 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS 1019 * @control.use_rts: use RTS 1020 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS 1021 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only) 1022 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table 1023 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients 1024 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL) 1025 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL) 1026 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags 1027 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs) 1028 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space 1029 * @pad: padding 1030 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates 1031 * @status: union part for status data 1032 * @status.rates: attempted rates 1033 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal 1034 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length 1035 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length 1036 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy) 1037 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only 1038 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness 1039 * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid 1040 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area 1041 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data 1042 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK 1043 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers 1044 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames. 1045 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1046 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames. 1047 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1048 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame 1049 */ 1050 struct ieee80211_tx_info { 1051 /* common information */ 1052 u32 flags; 1053 u32 band:3, 1054 ack_frame_id:13, 1055 hw_queue:4, 1056 tx_time_est:10; 1057 /* 2 free bits */ 1058 1059 union { 1060 struct { 1061 union { 1062 /* rate control */ 1063 struct { 1064 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[ 1065 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1066 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx; 1067 u8 use_rts:1; 1068 u8 use_cts_prot:1; 1069 u8 short_preamble:1; 1070 u8 skip_table:1; 1071 /* 2 bytes free */ 1072 }; 1073 /* only needed before rate control */ 1074 unsigned long jiffies; 1075 }; 1076 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */ 1077 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 1078 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key; 1079 u32 flags; 1080 codel_time_t enqueue_time; 1081 } control; 1082 struct { 1083 u64 cookie; 1084 } ack; 1085 struct { 1086 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1087 s32 ack_signal; 1088 u8 ampdu_ack_len; 1089 u8 ampdu_len; 1090 u8 antenna; 1091 u16 tx_time; 1092 bool is_valid_ack_signal; 1093 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)]; 1094 } status; 1095 struct { 1096 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[ 1097 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1098 u8 pad[4]; 1099 1100 void *rate_driver_data[ 1101 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1102 }; 1103 void *driver_data[ 1104 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1105 }; 1106 }; 1107 1108 static inline u16 1109 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est) 1110 { 1111 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime 1112 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1 1113 */ 1114 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2; 1115 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1116 } 1117 1118 static inline u16 1119 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1120 { 1121 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1122 } 1123 1124 /** 1125 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control 1126 * 1127 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for 1128 * @info: Basic tx status information 1129 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver) 1130 * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet 1131 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver 1132 */ 1133 struct ieee80211_tx_status { 1134 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 1135 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info; 1136 struct sk_buff *skb; 1137 struct rate_info *rate; 1138 struct list_head *free_list; 1139 }; 1140 1141 /** 1142 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs 1143 * 1144 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan 1145 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace 1146 * and the ones generated by mac80211. 1147 * 1148 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs. 1149 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs. 1150 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones) 1151 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies 1152 */ 1153 struct ieee80211_scan_ies { 1154 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1155 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1156 const u8 *common_ies; 1157 size_t common_ie_len; 1158 }; 1159 1160 1161 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1162 { 1163 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb; 1164 } 1165 1166 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1167 { 1168 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb; 1169 } 1170 1171 /** 1172 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status 1173 * 1174 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared. 1175 * 1176 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report 1177 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything 1178 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear 1179 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway). 1180 * 1181 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use 1182 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data 1183 * instead if you need only the less space that allows. 1184 */ 1185 static inline void 1186 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1187 { 1188 int i; 1189 1190 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1191 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates)); 1192 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1193 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates)); 1194 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8); 1195 /* clear the rate counts */ 1196 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++) 1197 info->status.rates[i].count = 0; 1198 1199 BUILD_BUG_ON( 1200 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20); 1201 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0, 1202 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) - 1203 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len)); 1204 } 1205 1206 1207 /** 1208 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags 1209 * 1210 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status. 1211 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame. 1212 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED. 1213 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware. 1214 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame, 1215 * verification has been done by the hardware. 1216 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame. 1217 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection 1218 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that. 1219 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this 1220 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection. 1221 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame 1222 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set) 1223 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did 1224 * de-duplication by itself. 1225 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on 1226 * the frame. 1227 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on 1228 * the frame. 1229 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1230 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU 1231 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS 1232 * merging. 1233 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1234 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU 1235 * (including FCS) was received. 1236 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1237 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received. 1238 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present. 1239 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU) 1240 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference 1241 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for 1242 * each A-MPDU 1243 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all 1244 * subframes of a single A-MPDU 1245 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU 1246 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected 1247 * on this subframe 1248 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC 1249 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field) 1250 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was 1251 * done by the hardware 1252 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without 1253 * processing it in any regular way. 1254 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1255 * them for sniffing purposes. 1256 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except 1257 * monitor interfaces. 1258 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1259 * them for sniffing purposes. 1260 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU 1261 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons. 1262 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g. 1263 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while 1264 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to 1265 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU 1266 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be 1267 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be 1268 * interleaved with other frames. 1269 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific 1270 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by 1271 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap. 1272 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before. 1273 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as 1274 * the first subframe. 1275 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must 1276 * be done in the hardware. 1277 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this 1278 * frame 1279 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known 1280 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present 1281 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in 1282 * 1283 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS 1284 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM 1285 * - DATA3_CODING 1286 * - DATA5_GI 1287 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC 1288 * - DATA6_NSTS 1289 * - DATA3_STBC 1290 * 1291 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data) 1292 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present 1293 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu) 1294 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present 1295 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with 1296 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is 1297 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't 1298 * known the frame shouldn't be reported. 1299 */ 1300 enum mac80211_rx_flags { 1301 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0), 1302 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1), 1303 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2), 1304 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3), 1305 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4), 1306 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5), 1307 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6), 1308 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7), 1309 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8), 1310 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9), 1311 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10), 1312 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11), 1313 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12), 1314 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13), 1315 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14), 1316 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15), 1317 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16), 1318 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17), 1319 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18), 1320 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19), 1321 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20), 1322 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21), 1323 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22), 1324 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23), 1325 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24), 1326 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25), 1327 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26), 1328 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27), 1329 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28), 1330 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29), 1331 }; 1332 1333 /** 1334 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags 1335 * 1336 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame 1337 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used 1338 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, 1339 * if the driver fills this value it should add 1340 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT 1341 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact. 1342 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used 1343 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3 1344 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed 1345 */ 1346 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags { 1347 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0), 1348 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2), 1349 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3), 1350 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5), 1351 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6), 1352 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7), 1353 }; 1354 1355 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4 1356 1357 enum mac80211_rx_encoding { 1358 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0, 1359 RX_ENC_HT, 1360 RX_ENC_VHT, 1361 RX_ENC_HE, 1362 }; 1363 1364 /** 1365 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status 1366 * 1367 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset 1368 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received 1369 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb). 1370 * 1371 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function 1372 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware. 1373 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is 1374 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache. 1375 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use 1376 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation 1377 * @band: the active band when this frame was received 1378 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz 1379 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed 1380 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting. 1381 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz. 1382 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or 1383 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags 1384 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_* 1385 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength 1386 * values were filled. 1387 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't 1388 * support dB or unspecified units) 1389 * @antenna: antenna used 1390 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if 1391 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT) 1392 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only) 1393 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\* 1394 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding 1395 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw 1396 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags 1397 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc 1398 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi 1399 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value 1400 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211 1401 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for 1402 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU 1403 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC 1404 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU 1405 */ 1406 struct ieee80211_rx_status { 1407 u64 mactime; 1408 u64 boottime_ns; 1409 u32 device_timestamp; 1410 u32 ampdu_reference; 1411 u32 flag; 1412 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1; 1413 u8 enc_flags; 1414 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3; 1415 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1; 1416 u8 rate_idx; 1417 u8 nss; 1418 u8 rx_flags; 1419 u8 band; 1420 u8 antenna; 1421 s8 signal; 1422 u8 chains; 1423 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS]; 1424 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc; 1425 u8 zero_length_psdu_type; 1426 }; 1427 1428 static inline u32 1429 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status) 1430 { 1431 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) + 1432 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0); 1433 } 1434 1435 /** 1436 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information 1437 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace 1438 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more 1439 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that) 1440 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed 1441 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace 1442 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment) 1443 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1! 1444 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI 1445 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace 1446 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done 1447 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the 1448 * @data field. 1449 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that 1450 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd 1451 * length 1452 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data 1453 * 1454 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before 1455 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns 1456 * data. 1457 */ 1458 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap { 1459 u32 present; 1460 u8 align; 1461 u8 oui[3]; 1462 u8 subns; 1463 u8 pad; 1464 u16 len; 1465 u8 data[]; 1466 } __packed; 1467 1468 /** 1469 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags 1470 * 1471 * Flags to define PHY configuration options 1472 * 1473 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this 1474 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets 1475 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags! 1476 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only). 1477 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2, 1478 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to 1479 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames. 1480 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states, 1481 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support" 1482 * for more. 1483 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set 1484 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but 1485 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will 1486 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but 1487 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active. 1488 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main 1489 * operating channel. 1490 */ 1491 enum ieee80211_conf_flags { 1492 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0), 1493 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1), 1494 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2), 1495 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3), 1496 }; 1497 1498 1499 /** 1500 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed 1501 * 1502 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed 1503 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed 1504 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed 1505 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed 1506 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed 1507 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed 1508 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed 1509 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed 1510 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1511 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1512 */ 1513 enum ieee80211_conf_changed { 1514 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1), 1515 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2), 1516 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3), 1517 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4), 1518 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5), 1519 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6), 1520 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7), 1521 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8), 1522 }; 1523 1524 /** 1525 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode 1526 * 1527 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic 1528 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off 1529 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static 1530 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic 1531 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use 1532 */ 1533 enum ieee80211_smps_mode { 1534 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC, 1535 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF, 1536 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC, 1537 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC, 1538 1539 /* keep last */ 1540 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES, 1541 }; 1542 1543 /** 1544 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device 1545 * 1546 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware. 1547 * 1548 * @flags: configuration flags defined above 1549 * 1550 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval 1551 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use 1552 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon 1553 * has been received and the DTIM period is known. 1554 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the 1555 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when 1556 * the CONF_PS flag is set. 1557 * 1558 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility 1559 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces 1560 * 1561 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to 1562 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled 1563 * 1564 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame 1565 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11, 1566 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries 1567 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short" 1568 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the 1569 * number of transmissions not the number of retries 1570 * 1571 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that 1572 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not 1573 * configured for an HT channel. 1574 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1575 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1576 */ 1577 struct ieee80211_conf { 1578 u32 flags; 1579 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout; 1580 1581 u16 listen_interval; 1582 u8 ps_dtim_period; 1583 1584 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count; 1585 1586 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1587 bool radar_enabled; 1588 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 1589 }; 1590 1591 /** 1592 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data 1593 * 1594 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch 1595 * operation. 1596 * 1597 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization 1598 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch 1599 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter 1600 * the driver passed into mac80211. 1601 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the 1602 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211. 1603 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the 1604 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP. 1605 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to 1606 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event 1607 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in 1608 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new 1609 * channel, expressed in TU. 1610 */ 1611 struct ieee80211_channel_switch { 1612 u64 timestamp; 1613 u32 device_timestamp; 1614 bool block_tx; 1615 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1616 u8 count; 1617 u32 delay; 1618 }; 1619 1620 /** 1621 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags 1622 * 1623 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering 1624 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups 1625 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality 1626 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor 1627 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and 1628 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached. 1629 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this 1630 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition, 1631 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is 1632 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces. 1633 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes 1634 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even 1635 * this is not pure P2P vif. 1636 */ 1637 enum ieee80211_vif_flags { 1638 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0), 1639 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1), 1640 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2), 1641 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3), 1642 }; 1643 1644 1645 /** 1646 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags 1647 * 1648 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled 1649 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211. 1650 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface. 1651 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload 1652 */ 1653 1654 enum ieee80211_offload_flags { 1655 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0), 1656 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1), 1657 }; 1658 1659 /** 1660 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data 1661 * 1662 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver 1663 * use during the life of a virtual interface. 1664 * 1665 * @type: type of this virtual interface 1666 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own 1667 * or the BSS we're associated to 1668 * @addr: address of this interface 1669 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p 1670 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively 1671 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is 1672 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine 1673 * for read access. 1674 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability 1675 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface, 1676 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added 1677 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed 1678 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field 1679 * @offloaad_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface. 1680 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface, 1681 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver 1682 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change 1683 * restrictions. 1684 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC 1685 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only 1686 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL 1687 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX 1688 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always 1689 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be 1690 * processed after it switches back to %NULL. 1691 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per 1692 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual 1693 * monitor interface (if that is requested.) 1694 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this 1695 * interface. 1696 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211 1697 * for this interface. 1698 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 1699 * sizeof(void \*). 1700 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction) 1701 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped, 1702 * protected by fq->lock. 1703 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see 1704 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags. 1705 */ 1706 struct ieee80211_vif { 1707 enum nl80211_iftype type; 1708 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf; 1709 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1710 bool p2p; 1711 bool csa_active; 1712 bool mu_mimo_owner; 1713 1714 u8 cab_queue; 1715 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1716 1717 struct ieee80211_txq *txq; 1718 1719 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf; 1720 1721 u32 driver_flags; 1722 u32 offload_flags; 1723 1724 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 1725 struct dentry *debugfs_dir; 1726 #endif 1727 1728 bool probe_req_reg; 1729 bool rx_mcast_action_reg; 1730 1731 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1732 1733 /* must be last */ 1734 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 1735 }; 1736 1737 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 1738 { 1739 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH 1740 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT; 1741 #endif 1742 return false; 1743 } 1744 1745 /** 1746 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev 1747 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for 1748 * 1749 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1750 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev. 1751 * 1752 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't 1753 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 1754 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 1755 */ 1756 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev); 1757 1758 /** 1759 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif 1760 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for 1761 * 1762 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1763 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif. 1764 * 1765 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't 1766 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 1767 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 1768 */ 1769 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 1770 1771 /** 1772 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags 1773 * 1774 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver 1775 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf. 1776 * 1777 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the 1778 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this 1779 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs 1780 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC. 1781 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by 1782 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC 1783 * generation in software. 1784 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates 1785 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key. 1786 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a 1787 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames 1788 * (MFP) to be done in software. 1789 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver 1790 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV 1791 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with 1792 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does 1793 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or 1794 * MIC. 1795 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received 1796 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware 1797 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames 1798 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and 1799 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with 1800 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the 1801 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW. 1802 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the 1803 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation 1804 * only for management frames (MFP). 1805 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the 1806 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always 1807 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled. 1808 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for 1809 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with 1810 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key. 1811 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation. 1812 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver 1813 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number 1814 * generation only 1815 */ 1816 enum ieee80211_key_flags { 1817 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0), 1818 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1), 1819 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2), 1820 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3), 1821 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4), 1822 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5), 1823 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6), 1824 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7), 1825 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8), 1826 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9), 1827 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10), 1828 }; 1829 1830 /** 1831 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information 1832 * 1833 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by 1834 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops. 1835 * 1836 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver 1837 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be 1838 * encrypted in hardware. 1839 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector. 1840 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it 1841 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO) 1842 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags. 1843 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3) 1844 * @keylen: key material length 1845 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte) 1846 * data block: 1847 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits) 1848 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits) 1849 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits) 1850 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type 1851 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type 1852 */ 1853 struct ieee80211_key_conf { 1854 atomic64_t tx_pn; 1855 u32 cipher; 1856 u8 icv_len; 1857 u8 iv_len; 1858 u8 hw_key_idx; 1859 s8 keyidx; 1860 u16 flags; 1861 u8 keylen; 1862 u8 key[]; 1863 }; 1864 1865 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16 1866 1867 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff)) 1868 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff)) 1869 1870 /** 1871 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter 1872 * 1873 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order 1874 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1875 * reverse order than in packet) 1876 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1877 * reverse order than in packet) 1878 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1879 * reverse order than in packet) 1880 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1881 * reverse order than in packet) 1882 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys 1883 */ 1884 struct ieee80211_key_seq { 1885 union { 1886 struct { 1887 u32 iv32; 1888 u16 iv16; 1889 } tkip; 1890 struct { 1891 u8 pn[6]; 1892 } ccmp; 1893 struct { 1894 u8 pn[6]; 1895 } aes_cmac; 1896 struct { 1897 u8 pn[6]; 1898 } aes_gmac; 1899 struct { 1900 u8 pn[6]; 1901 } gcmp; 1902 struct { 1903 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN]; 1904 u8 seq_len; 1905 } hw; 1906 }; 1907 }; 1908 1909 /** 1910 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme 1911 * 1912 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining 1913 * the secure packet crypto handling. 1914 * 1915 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector 1916 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage 1917 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher 1918 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header 1919 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header 1920 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header 1921 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits 1922 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx 1923 * key_idx value calculation: 1924 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift 1925 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes 1926 */ 1927 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme { 1928 u32 cipher; 1929 u16 iftype; 1930 u8 hdr_len; 1931 u8 pn_len; 1932 u8 pn_off; 1933 u8 key_idx_off; 1934 u8 key_idx_mask; 1935 u8 key_idx_shift; 1936 u8 mic_len; 1937 }; 1938 1939 /** 1940 * enum set_key_cmd - key command 1941 * 1942 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 1943 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added. 1944 * 1945 * @SET_KEY: a key is set 1946 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled 1947 */ 1948 enum set_key_cmd { 1949 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY, 1950 }; 1951 1952 /** 1953 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state 1954 * 1955 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all, 1956 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions 1957 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state 1958 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated 1959 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated 1960 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X) 1961 */ 1962 enum ieee80211_sta_state { 1963 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */ 1964 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST, 1965 IEEE80211_STA_NONE, 1966 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH, 1967 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC, 1968 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED, 1969 }; 1970 1971 /** 1972 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth 1973 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz 1974 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz 1975 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz 1976 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz 1977 * (including 80+80 MHz) 1978 * 1979 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized 1980 * correctly, the values must be sorted. 1981 */ 1982 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth { 1983 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0, 1984 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40, 1985 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80, 1986 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160, 1987 }; 1988 1989 /** 1990 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table 1991 * 1992 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update 1993 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default. 1994 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control. 1995 */ 1996 struct ieee80211_sta_rates { 1997 struct rcu_head rcu_head; 1998 struct { 1999 s8 idx; 2000 u8 count; 2001 u8 count_cts; 2002 u8 count_rts; 2003 u16 flags; 2004 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE]; 2005 }; 2006 2007 /** 2008 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration 2009 * 2010 * Used to configure txpower for station. 2011 * 2012 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames 2013 * to the STA. 2014 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power 2015 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC 2016 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power. 2017 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for 2018 * per peer TPC. 2019 */ 2020 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr { 2021 s16 power; 2022 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type; 2023 }; 2024 2025 /** 2026 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry 2027 * 2028 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly 2029 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in 2030 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must 2031 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly, 2032 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a 2033 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it. 2034 * 2035 * @addr: MAC address 2036 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP 2037 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band) 2038 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2039 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2040 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA 2041 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities 2042 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU 2043 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us. 2044 * Can be modified by driver. 2045 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does, 2046 * otherwise always false) 2047 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2048 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information. 2049 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid 2050 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in 2051 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*. 2052 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported. 2053 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with 2054 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the 2055 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode 2056 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after 2057 * the station moves to associated state. 2058 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic) 2059 * @rates: rate control selection table 2060 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer 2061 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only 2062 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place. 2063 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not. 2064 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single 2065 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means 2066 * unlimited. 2067 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not. 2068 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control. 2069 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID 2070 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration 2071 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that 2072 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames 2073 */ 2074 struct ieee80211_sta { 2075 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 2076 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2077 u16 aid; 2078 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap; 2079 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap; 2080 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap; 2081 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa; 2082 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2083 bool wme; 2084 u8 uapsd_queues; 2085 u8 max_sp; 2086 u8 rx_nss; 2087 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth; 2088 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 2089 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates; 2090 bool tdls; 2091 bool tdls_initiator; 2092 bool mfp; 2093 u8 max_amsdu_subframes; 2094 2095 /** 2096 * @max_amsdu_len: 2097 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. 2098 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. 2099 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply: 2100 * 2101 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the 2102 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes. 2103 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal 2104 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes. 2105 * 2106 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level 2107 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 2108 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2). 2109 */ 2110 u16 max_amsdu_len; 2111 bool support_p2p_ps; 2112 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len; 2113 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS]; 2114 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr; 2115 2116 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1]; 2117 2118 /* must be last */ 2119 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2120 }; 2121 2122 /** 2123 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command 2124 * 2125 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2126 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition. 2127 * 2128 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping 2129 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up 2130 */ 2131 enum sta_notify_cmd { 2132 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE, 2133 }; 2134 2135 /** 2136 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data 2137 * 2138 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and 2139 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU. 2140 */ 2141 struct ieee80211_tx_control { 2142 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2143 }; 2144 2145 /** 2146 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue 2147 * 2148 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 2149 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue 2150 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue), 2151 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled) 2152 * @ac: the AC for this queue 2153 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size 2154 * 2155 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling 2156 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). 2157 */ 2158 struct ieee80211_txq { 2159 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 2160 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2161 u8 tid; 2162 u8 ac; 2163 2164 /* must be last */ 2165 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2166 }; 2167 2168 /** 2169 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags 2170 * 2171 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to 2172 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning 2173 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting 2174 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule, 2175 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully. 2176 * 2177 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL: 2178 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be 2179 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm 2180 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace 2181 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control 2182 * algorithm. 2183 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of 2184 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have 2185 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config 2186 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot 2187 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for 2188 * CCK frames. 2189 * 2190 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS: 2191 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include 2192 * the FCS at the end. 2193 * 2194 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING: 2195 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames 2196 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others 2197 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used 2198 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and 2199 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that 2200 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(). 2201 * 2202 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC: 2203 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We 2204 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal. 2205 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead. 2206 * 2207 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM: 2208 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from 2209 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized 2210 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set. 2211 * 2212 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT: 2213 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h 2214 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC 2215 * 2216 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION: 2217 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation. 2218 * 2219 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS: 2220 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep). 2221 * 2222 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK: 2223 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies 2224 * stack support for dynamic PS. 2225 * 2226 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS: 2227 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS. 2228 * 2229 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE: 2230 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w). 2231 * 2232 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS: 2233 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to 2234 * the stack. 2235 * 2236 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR: 2237 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including 2238 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss. 2239 * 2240 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC: 2241 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e. 2242 * dtim_period). 2243 * 2244 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports 2245 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If 2246 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not 2247 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still 2248 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag 2249 * only in that case. 2250 * 2251 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device 2252 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When 2253 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected 2254 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames. 2255 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure 2256 * the PS mode of connected stations. 2257 * 2258 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session 2259 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in 2260 * software. 2261 * 2262 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of 2263 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only 2264 * active interfaces. 2265 * 2266 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to 2267 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as 2268 * desired (and thus have them named as desired). 2269 * 2270 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the 2271 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically 2272 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if 2273 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its 2274 * supported cipher suites. 2275 * 2276 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit, 2277 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration 2278 * for frames. 2279 * 2280 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface 2281 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC) 2282 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue 2283 * control for more details. 2284 * 2285 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate 2286 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm. 2287 * 2288 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any 2289 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface 2290 * is supported. 2291 * 2292 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames 2293 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon. 2294 * 2295 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates 2296 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not 2297 * using aggregation for such frames.) 2298 * 2299 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA) 2300 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support 2301 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the 2302 * CSA frame. 2303 * 2304 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload 2305 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first. 2306 * 2307 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands 2308 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band. 2309 * 2310 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth 2311 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel. 2312 * 2313 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs 2314 * within A-MPDU. 2315 * 2316 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status 2317 * for sent beacons. 2318 * 2319 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each 2320 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified 2321 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station 2322 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time. 2323 * 2324 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the 2325 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in 2326 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session 2327 * timeout. 2328 * 2329 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX, 2330 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics. 2331 * 2332 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated 2333 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support. 2334 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must 2335 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting 2336 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta. 2337 * 2338 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list 2339 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU. 2340 * 2341 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event 2342 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such 2343 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver 2344 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout. 2345 * 2346 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself. 2347 * The stack will not do fragmentation. 2348 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well. 2349 * 2350 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on 2351 * TDLS links. 2352 * 2353 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the 2354 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a 2355 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no 2356 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the 2357 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of 2358 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the 2359 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted. 2360 * 2361 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't 2362 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug. 2363 * 2364 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of 2365 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with. 2366 * 2367 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT 2368 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if 2369 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW 2370 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver. 2371 * See also the documentation for that flag. 2372 * 2373 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all 2374 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use 2375 * TXQs to start with. 2376 * 2377 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU 2378 * length in tx status information 2379 * 2380 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2381 * 2382 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2383 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set. 2384 * 2385 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only 2386 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx 2387 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID. 2388 * 2389 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation 2390 * offload 2391 * 2392 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays 2393 */ 2394 enum ieee80211_hw_flags { 2395 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL, 2396 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS, 2397 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING, 2398 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, 2399 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM, 2400 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC, 2401 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT, 2402 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION, 2403 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS, 2404 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK, 2405 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS, 2406 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE, 2407 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF, 2408 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF, 2409 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL, 2410 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT, 2411 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS, 2412 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR, 2413 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL, 2414 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK, 2415 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, 2416 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW, 2417 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE, 2418 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF, 2419 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY, 2420 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES, 2421 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA, 2422 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS, 2423 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS, 2424 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW, 2425 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU, 2426 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS, 2427 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR, 2428 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER, 2429 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS, 2430 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU, 2431 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST, 2432 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK, 2433 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG, 2434 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA, 2435 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, 2436 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP, 2437 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ, 2438 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW, 2439 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ, 2440 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN, 2441 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID, 2442 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID, 2443 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT, 2444 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD, 2445 2446 /* keep last, obviously */ 2447 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS 2448 }; 2449 2450 /** 2451 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state 2452 * 2453 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware 2454 * information for an 802.11 PHY. 2455 * 2456 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this 2457 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev 2458 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV() 2459 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported 2460 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here. 2461 * 2462 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use. 2463 * 2464 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use 2465 * along with this structure. 2466 * 2467 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags. 2468 * 2469 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb 2470 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.) 2471 * 2472 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb. 2473 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs. 2474 * 2475 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used 2476 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB 2477 * 2478 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval 2479 * that HW supports 2480 * 2481 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for 2482 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these 2483 * queues need to have configurable access parameters. 2484 * 2485 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware. 2486 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be 2487 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw(). 2488 * 2489 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2490 * within &struct ieee80211_vif. 2491 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2492 * within &struct ieee80211_sta. 2493 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2494 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf. 2495 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2496 * within @struct ieee80211_txq. 2497 * 2498 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw 2499 * can handle. 2500 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages 2501 * the hw can report back. 2502 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage 2503 * 2504 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of 2505 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver 2506 * aggregation. 2507 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the 2508 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering 2509 * it shouldn't be set. 2510 * 2511 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an 2512 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll 2513 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if 2514 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N 2515 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012). 2516 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used. 2517 * 2518 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum 2519 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list. 2520 * 2521 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX 2522 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set) 2523 * 2524 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW 2525 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't 2526 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only 2527 * adding _BW is supported today. 2528 * 2529 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports, 2530 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH. 2531 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values. 2532 * 2533 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags 2534 * 2535 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the 2536 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp 2537 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status 2538 * device_timestamp. 2539 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a 2540 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a 2541 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value. 2542 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the 2543 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set. 2544 * 2545 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created 2546 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211, 2547 * other features will be rejected during HW registration. 2548 * 2549 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate 2550 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery- 2551 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap. 2552 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means 2553 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means 2554 * neither enabled. 2555 * 2556 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may 2557 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA. 2558 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values. 2559 * 2560 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions. 2561 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions 2562 * supported by HW. 2563 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the 2564 * device. 2565 * 2566 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from 2567 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed, 2568 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers. 2569 * 2570 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while 2571 * refilling deficit of each TXQ. 2572 * 2573 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set. 2574 */ 2575 struct ieee80211_hw { 2576 struct ieee80211_conf conf; 2577 struct wiphy *wiphy; 2578 const char *rate_control_algorithm; 2579 void *priv; 2580 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)]; 2581 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom; 2582 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom; 2583 int vif_data_size; 2584 int sta_data_size; 2585 int chanctx_data_size; 2586 int txq_data_size; 2587 u16 queues; 2588 u16 max_listen_interval; 2589 s8 max_signal; 2590 u8 max_rates; 2591 u8 max_report_rates; 2592 u8 max_rate_tries; 2593 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2594 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes; 2595 u8 max_tx_fragments; 2596 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue; 2597 u8 radiotap_mcs_details; 2598 u16 radiotap_vht_details; 2599 struct { 2600 int units_pos; 2601 s16 accuracy; 2602 } radiotap_timestamp; 2603 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 2604 u8 uapsd_queues; 2605 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len; 2606 u8 n_cipher_schemes; 2607 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes; 2608 u8 max_nan_de_entries; 2609 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift; 2610 u8 weight_multiplier; 2611 u32 max_mtu; 2612 }; 2613 2614 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2615 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2616 { 2617 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2618 } 2619 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2620 2621 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2622 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2623 { 2624 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2625 } 2626 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2627 2628 /** 2629 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request 2630 * 2631 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie) 2632 * @req: cfg80211 request. 2633 */ 2634 struct ieee80211_scan_request { 2635 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies; 2636 2637 /* Keep last */ 2638 struct cfg80211_scan_request req; 2639 }; 2640 2641 /** 2642 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters 2643 * 2644 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from 2645 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request 2646 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode 2647 * @status: channel-switch response status 2648 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received 2649 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2650 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2651 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template 2652 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb 2653 */ 2654 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params { 2655 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2656 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef; 2657 u8 action_code; 2658 u32 status; 2659 u32 timestamp; 2660 u16 switch_time; 2661 u16 switch_timeout; 2662 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb; 2663 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie; 2664 }; 2665 2666 /** 2667 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy 2668 * 2669 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query 2670 * 2671 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective 2672 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private 2673 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should 2674 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this 2675 * is already used internally by mac80211. 2676 * 2677 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy. 2678 */ 2679 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy); 2680 2681 /** 2682 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware 2683 * 2684 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for 2685 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 2686 */ 2687 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev) 2688 { 2689 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev); 2690 } 2691 2692 /** 2693 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware 2694 * 2695 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for 2696 * @addr: the address to set 2697 */ 2698 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr) 2699 { 2700 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN); 2701 } 2702 2703 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2704 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2705 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2706 { 2707 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0)) 2708 return NULL; 2709 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx]; 2710 } 2711 2712 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2713 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2714 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2715 { 2716 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0) 2717 return NULL; 2718 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx]; 2719 } 2720 2721 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2722 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2723 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx) 2724 { 2725 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0) 2726 return NULL; 2727 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx]; 2728 } 2729 2730 /** 2731 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb 2732 * @hw: the hardware 2733 * @skb: the skb 2734 * 2735 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure 2736 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported. 2737 */ 2738 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 2739 2740 /** 2741 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration 2742 * 2743 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware 2744 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations. 2745 * 2746 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given 2747 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and 2748 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL 2749 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to 2750 * the station information for the peer for individual keys. 2751 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when 2752 * VLANs are configured for an access point. 2753 * 2754 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx 2755 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf 2756 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function. 2757 * 2758 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if 2759 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be 2760 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the 2761 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range. 2762 * 2763 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is 2764 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if 2765 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the 2766 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software. 2767 * 2768 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed. 2769 * 2770 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key 2771 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any 2772 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather 2773 * based on the receive flags. 2774 * 2775 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key 2776 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key() 2777 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate 2778 * keys. 2779 * 2780 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption 2781 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key 2782 * handler. 2783 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key. 2784 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The 2785 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did 2786 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is 2787 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this 2788 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16. 2789 * 2790 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index 2791 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required 2792 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses). 2793 * 2794 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag 2795 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following 2796 * requirements: 2797 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to 2798 mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been 2799 completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key, 2800 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued 2801 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits), 2802 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command 2803 encrypted with the new key and 2804 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted. 2805 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver. 2806 */ 2807 2808 /** 2809 * DOC: Powersave support 2810 * 2811 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations. 2812 * 2813 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself, 2814 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware 2815 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode 2816 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status. 2817 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary, 2818 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required 2819 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when 2820 * it finds traffic directed to it. 2821 * 2822 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in 2823 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused 2824 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking 2825 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it 2826 * back to sleep at appropriate times. 2827 * 2828 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the 2829 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be 2830 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame. 2831 * 2832 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also 2833 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported 2834 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and 2835 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still 2836 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle 2837 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that 2838 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that. 2839 * 2840 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the 2841 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a 2842 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to 2843 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when 2844 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle 2845 * periods. 2846 * 2847 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling 2848 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS 2849 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally, 2850 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the 2851 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support 2852 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the 2853 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value 2854 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable 2855 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS 2856 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave. 2857 * 2858 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling 2859 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the 2860 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS 2861 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To 2862 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames 2863 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled. 2864 * 2865 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with 2866 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK. 2867 */ 2868 2869 /** 2870 * DOC: Beacon filter support 2871 * 2872 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups 2873 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that 2874 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly 2875 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the 2876 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That 2877 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information 2878 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed. 2879 * 2880 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER 2881 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support 2882 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When 2883 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the 2884 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss(). 2885 * 2886 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the 2887 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call 2888 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled 2889 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future. 2890 * 2891 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing 2892 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211 2893 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense 2894 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include 2895 * 2896 * - a list of information element IDs 2897 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element 2898 * 2899 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the 2900 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense 2901 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device 2902 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all 2903 * vendor information elements. 2904 * 2905 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information 2906 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon. 2907 * 2908 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing 2909 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing 2910 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and 2911 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136, 2912 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility 2913 * it could also include some currently unused IDs. 2914 * 2915 * 2916 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the 2917 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming 2918 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of 2919 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when 2920 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above 2921 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be 2922 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement 2923 * them as the roaming algorithm requires. 2924 * 2925 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to 2926 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the 2927 * signal strength threshold checking. 2928 */ 2929 2930 /** 2931 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save 2932 * 2933 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve 2934 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism 2935 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009) 2936 * "11.2.3 SM power save". 2937 * 2938 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames 2939 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct 2940 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the 2941 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware 2942 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by 2943 * hardware flags. 2944 * 2945 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211 2946 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS 2947 * turned off otherwise. 2948 * 2949 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate 2950 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config() 2951 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to 2952 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP. 2953 */ 2954 2955 /** 2956 * DOC: Frame filtering 2957 * 2958 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper 2959 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when 2960 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption, 2961 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is 2962 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible. 2963 * 2964 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell 2965 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be 2966 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out. 2967 * 2968 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast() 2969 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list 2970 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces. 2971 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to 2972 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the 2973 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and 2974 * @total_flags with the new flag states. 2975 * 2976 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will 2977 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count 2978 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted 2979 * or dropped. 2980 * 2981 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared. 2982 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_ 2983 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore 2984 * the flag, but not clear it. 2985 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the 2986 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type 2987 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it). 2988 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware 2989 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes 2990 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them, 2991 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag. 2992 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well. 2993 */ 2994 2995 /** 2996 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients 2997 * 2998 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for 2999 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD. 3000 * There currently is no support for sAPSD. 3001 * 3002 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client 3003 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time. 3004 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but 3005 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies 3006 * the driver code. 3007 * 3008 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete 3009 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set, 3010 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for 3011 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames. 3012 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of 3013 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't 3014 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD. 3015 * 3016 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the 3017 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a 3018 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is, 3019 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is 3020 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this 3021 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to 3022 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will 3023 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The 3024 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its 3025 * @sta_notify callback. 3026 * 3027 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up, 3028 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period. 3029 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and 3030 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When 3031 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211 3032 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames 3033 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit 3034 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER 3035 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only 3036 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to 3037 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have 3038 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS. 3039 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is 3040 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer. 3041 * 3042 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by 3043 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them. 3044 * 3045 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi 3046 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up 3047 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being 3048 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong 3049 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be 3050 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to 3051 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can 3052 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it 3053 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames 3054 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again 3055 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked. 3056 * 3057 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any 3058 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is 3059 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any 3060 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up 3061 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when 3062 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service 3063 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called 3064 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are 3065 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting 3066 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames, 3067 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if 3068 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames 3069 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the 3070 * buffers for those TIDs contain. 3071 * 3072 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may 3073 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must 3074 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that 3075 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid 3076 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released 3077 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp() 3078 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway. 3079 * 3080 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211 3081 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags 3082 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 3083 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame. 3084 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case. 3085 * 3086 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data 3087 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as 3088 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame 3089 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed. 3090 */ 3091 3092 /** 3093 * DOC: HW queue control 3094 * 3095 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static 3096 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This 3097 * was problematic for a few reasons: 3098 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames 3099 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly 3100 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames 3101 * 3102 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all 3103 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it 3104 * won't have the same problem with the software queues. 3105 * 3106 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability 3107 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do 3108 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif 3109 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will 3110 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and 3111 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors 3112 * the hardware queue. 3113 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue 3114 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.) 3115 * 3116 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual 3117 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to 3118 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a 3119 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have 3120 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios: 3121 * 3122 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3 3123 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7 3124 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8 3125 * off-channel queue: 9 3126 * 3127 * It would then set up the hardware like this: 3128 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9 3129 * 3130 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows: 3131 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0 3132 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1 3133 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2 3134 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3 3135 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3136 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7. 3137 * 3138 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second 3139 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC. 3140 * 3141 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3142 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the 3143 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when 3144 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode. 3145 */ 3146 3147 /** 3148 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags 3149 * 3150 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be 3151 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the 3152 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested, 3153 * but this has negative impact on power consumption. 3154 * 3155 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested 3156 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by 3157 * multicast address. 3158 * 3159 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the 3160 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them) 3161 * 3162 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set 3163 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them 3164 * 3165 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate 3166 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses 3167 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing 3168 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should 3169 * honour this flag if possible. 3170 * 3171 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this 3172 * station 3173 * 3174 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes 3175 * 3176 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames 3177 * 3178 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames 3179 * 3180 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames 3181 */ 3182 enum ieee80211_filter_flags { 3183 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1, 3184 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2, 3185 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3, 3186 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4, 3187 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5, 3188 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6, 3189 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7, 3190 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8, 3191 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9, 3192 }; 3193 3194 /** 3195 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions 3196 * 3197 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in 3198 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed. 3199 * 3200 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation 3201 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by 3202 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer 3203 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away! 3204 * 3205 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation 3206 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation 3207 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either 3208 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or 3209 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status 3210 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after 3211 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special 3212 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE. 3213 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational 3214 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting 3215 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the 3216 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(). 3217 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets, 3218 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call 3219 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the 3220 * session is gone and removes the station. 3221 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped 3222 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and 3223 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers 3224 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called. 3225 */ 3226 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action { 3227 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START, 3228 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP, 3229 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START, 3230 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT, 3231 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH, 3232 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT, 3233 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL, 3234 }; 3235 3236 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1 3237 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2 3238 3239 /** 3240 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters 3241 * 3242 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3243 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session 3244 * @tid: tid of the BA session 3245 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When 3246 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the 3247 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here. 3248 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the 3249 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or 3250 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3251 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU. 3252 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3253 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to 3254 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START 3255 */ 3256 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params { 3257 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action; 3258 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3259 u16 tid; 3260 u16 ssn; 3261 u16 buf_size; 3262 bool amsdu; 3263 u16 timeout; 3264 }; 3265 3266 /** 3267 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason 3268 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll 3269 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to 3270 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC 3271 */ 3272 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type { 3273 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL, 3274 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD, 3275 }; 3276 3277 /** 3278 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed 3279 * 3280 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit 3281 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station 3282 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40 3283 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes. 3284 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed. 3285 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer 3286 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about 3287 * the peer. 3288 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed 3289 * by the peer 3290 */ 3291 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed { 3292 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0), 3293 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1), 3294 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2), 3295 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3), 3296 }; 3297 3298 /** 3299 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type 3300 * 3301 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations, 3302 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other 3303 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa). 3304 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC 3305 * operations compared to other operations/flows. 3306 * 3307 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC. 3308 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required 3309 * for sending management frames offchannel. 3310 */ 3311 enum ieee80211_roc_type { 3312 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0, 3313 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX, 3314 }; 3315 3316 /** 3317 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type 3318 * 3319 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what 3320 * reconfiguration type was completed. 3321 * 3322 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type 3323 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1) 3324 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless 3325 * of wowlan configuration) 3326 */ 3327 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type { 3328 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART, 3329 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND, 3330 }; 3331 3332 /** 3333 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver 3334 * 3335 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may 3336 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure 3337 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame. 3338 * 3339 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame. 3340 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header. 3341 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on 3342 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should, 3343 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately. 3344 * Must be atomic. 3345 * 3346 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware 3347 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on 3348 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.) 3349 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace, 3350 * or zero. 3351 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address 3352 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device 3353 * is added. 3354 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3355 * 3356 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware 3357 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least 3358 * it must turn off frame reception.) 3359 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects 3360 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue 3361 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback. 3362 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3363 * 3364 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and 3365 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then 3366 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is 3367 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and 3368 * reconfigured at resume time. 3369 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it 3370 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only 3371 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it 3372 * must return 1 from this function. 3373 * 3374 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is 3375 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully 3376 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is 3377 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211 3378 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume. 3379 * 3380 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is 3381 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is 3382 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only 3383 * in suspend(). 3384 * 3385 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is 3386 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start 3387 * and @stop must be implemented. 3388 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before 3389 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the 3390 * interface is given in the conf parameter. 3391 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a 3392 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.) 3393 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3394 * 3395 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback 3396 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be 3397 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep. 3398 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be 3399 * found by the interface iteration callbacks. 3400 * 3401 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down. 3402 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface 3403 * and no monitor interfaces are present. 3404 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware 3405 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets, 3406 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the 3407 * MAC address of the device going away. 3408 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep. 3409 * 3410 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this 3411 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel. 3412 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code 3413 * if it does. The callback can sleep. 3414 * 3415 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS 3416 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low 3417 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters). 3418 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless 3419 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which 3420 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback 3421 * can sleep. 3422 * 3423 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration. 3424 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed 3425 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic. 3426 * 3427 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter. 3428 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information. 3429 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep. 3430 * 3431 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter. 3432 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames 3433 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination 3434 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates 3435 * which flags are changed. 3436 * This callback can sleep. 3437 * 3438 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit 3439 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic. 3440 * 3441 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3442 * This callback is only called between add_interface and 3443 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface 3444 * is enabled. 3445 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added. 3446 * The callback can sleep. 3447 * 3448 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3449 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers 3450 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY. 3451 * The callback must be atomic. 3452 * 3453 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the 3454 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data 3455 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter. 3456 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify 3457 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(). 3458 * 3459 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for 3460 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP 3461 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it. 3462 * 3463 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start 3464 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel 3465 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's 3466 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure 3467 * that power save is disabled. 3468 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the 3469 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these 3470 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the 3471 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable). 3472 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called; 3473 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to 3474 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code. 3475 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1, 3476 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a 3477 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this 3478 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't 3479 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is. 3480 * The callback can sleep. 3481 * 3482 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan. 3483 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible), 3484 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call 3485 * ieee80211_scan_completed(). 3486 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new 3487 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended. 3488 * The callback can sleep. 3489 * 3490 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at 3491 * specific intervals. The driver must call the 3492 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results. 3493 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called. 3494 * 3495 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan. 3496 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called. 3497 * 3498 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan 3499 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification. 3500 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR, 3501 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it 3502 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep. 3503 * 3504 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a 3505 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need 3506 * this notification. 3507 * The callback can sleep. 3508 * 3509 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics. 3510 * Returns zero if statistics are available. 3511 * The callback can sleep. 3512 * 3513 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does 3514 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the 3515 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware. 3516 * The callback must be atomic. 3517 * 3518 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this 3519 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the 3520 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG 3521 * should be set as well. 3522 * The callback can sleep. 3523 * 3524 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it) 3525 * The callback can sleep. 3526 * 3527 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station, 3528 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep. 3529 * 3530 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated 3531 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback 3532 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected; 3533 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing 3534 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3535 * This callback can sleep. 3536 * 3537 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 3538 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback 3539 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 3540 * callback can sleep. 3541 * 3542 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an 3543 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating 3544 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag 3545 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic. 3546 * 3547 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx 3548 * power for the station. 3549 * This callback can sleep. 3550 * 3551 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a 3552 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.) 3553 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove. 3554 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions 3555 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it 3556 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace 3557 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station. 3558 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3559 * The callback can sleep. 3560 * 3561 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU 3562 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station 3563 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear 3564 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse 3565 * in @sta_state. 3566 * The callback can sleep. 3567 * 3568 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be 3569 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits 3570 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected 3571 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver 3572 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since 3573 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly. 3574 * Must be atomic. 3575 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This 3576 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses 3577 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic. 3578 * 3579 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon 3580 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so 3581 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of 3582 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not 3583 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible. 3584 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 3585 * The callback can sleep. 3586 * 3587 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max), 3588 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue. 3589 * Returns a negative error code on failure. 3590 * The callback can sleep. 3591 * 3592 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently, 3593 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a 3594 * required function. 3595 * The callback can sleep. 3596 * 3597 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware. 3598 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a 3599 * required function. 3600 * The callback can sleep. 3601 * 3602 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the 3603 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between 3604 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up 3605 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function. 3606 * The callback can sleep. 3607 * 3608 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize 3609 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This 3610 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of 3611 * TSF synchronization. 3612 * The callback can sleep. 3613 * 3614 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us. 3615 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is 3616 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests. 3617 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon. 3618 * The callback can sleep. 3619 * 3620 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information 3621 * 3622 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also 3623 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration, 3624 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback. 3625 * The callback can sleep. 3626 * 3627 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified 3628 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout 3629 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout 3630 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for 3631 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep. 3632 * 3633 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may 3634 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep. 3635 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep. 3636 * 3637 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure 3638 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap 3639 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces 3640 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues. 3641 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped. 3642 * Note that vif can be NULL. 3643 * The callback can sleep. 3644 * 3645 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel 3646 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this 3647 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate 3648 * completion of the channel switch. 3649 * 3650 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device. 3651 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may 3652 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL 3653 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX). 3654 * 3655 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant). 3656 * 3657 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must 3658 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note 3659 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw 3660 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted 3661 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the 3662 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call 3663 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(). 3664 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and 3665 * must be accepted in this case. 3666 * This callback may sleep. 3667 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is 3668 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep. 3669 * 3670 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes. 3671 * 3672 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes. 3673 * 3674 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware 3675 * queues before entering power save. 3676 * 3677 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection 3678 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled. 3679 * The callback can sleep. 3680 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See 3681 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types. 3682 * The callback must be atomic. 3683 * 3684 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given 3685 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for 3686 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver 3687 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD. 3688 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check 3689 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than 3690 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in 3691 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the 3692 * more-data bit must always be set. 3693 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames 3694 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set. 3695 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the 3696 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In 3697 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3698 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll 3699 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple 3700 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame. 3701 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be 3702 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send 3703 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for 3704 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the 3705 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP 3706 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function 3707 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP. 3708 * This callback must be atomic. 3709 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames 3710 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211 3711 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames 3712 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set 3713 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case 3714 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder 3715 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3716 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP 3717 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the 3718 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function. 3719 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the 3720 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set. 3721 * This callback must be atomic. 3722 * 3723 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count. 3724 * 3725 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats. 3726 * 3727 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats 3728 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets. 3729 * 3730 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association 3731 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is 3732 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated 3733 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any 3734 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's 3735 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a 3736 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the 3737 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response 3738 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO. 3739 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211 3740 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication 3741 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO. 3742 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return 3743 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away. 3744 * If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the 3745 * duration for which the operation is requested. 3746 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep. 3747 * 3748 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending 3749 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's 3750 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS 3751 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP. 3752 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS 3753 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least 3754 * 2 * (DTIM period). 3755 * The callback is optional and can sleep. 3756 * 3757 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation. 3758 * This callback may sleep. 3759 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction. 3760 * This callback may sleep. 3761 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that 3762 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same 3763 * channel context with different settings 3764 * This callback may sleep. 3765 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound 3766 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping. 3767 * This callback may sleep. 3768 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being 3769 * unbound from vif. 3770 * This callback may sleep. 3771 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to 3772 * another, as specified in the list of 3773 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according 3774 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode. 3775 * This callback may sleep. 3776 * 3777 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the 3778 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel 3779 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses 3780 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is 3781 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being 3782 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed. 3783 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface. 3784 * 3785 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and 3786 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed. 3787 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and 3788 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames). 3789 * This callback may sleep. 3790 * 3791 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed. 3792 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces. 3793 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep. 3794 * 3795 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel. 3796 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this 3797 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be 3798 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call 3799 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get() 3800 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is 3801 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been 3802 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish(). 3803 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called, 3804 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway. 3805 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3806 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA 3807 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing 3808 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch. 3809 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3810 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the 3811 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 3812 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3813 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the 3814 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 3815 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called 3816 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with 3817 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count. 3818 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all 3819 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A 3820 * channel context is bound before this is called. 3821 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again. 3822 * 3823 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the 3824 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0 3825 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide. 3826 * 3827 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration 3828 * and hardware limits. 3829 * 3830 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver 3831 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations 3832 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The 3833 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of 3834 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation. 3835 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can 3836 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use. 3837 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both 3838 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes. 3839 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or 3840 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets 3841 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue 3842 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch 3843 * response template is provided, together with the location of the 3844 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within 3845 * the function call. 3846 * 3847 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue. 3848 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a 3849 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues 3850 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action 3851 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet. 3852 * 3853 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one. 3854 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster. 3855 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf 3856 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters 3857 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config. 3858 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since 3859 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the 3860 * changed parameters. 3861 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in 3862 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of 3863 * this call. 3864 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call 3865 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with 3866 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal. 3867 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports 3868 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation 3869 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while 3870 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU. 3871 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available. 3872 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided. 3873 * 3874 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep) 3875 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep) 3876 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep. 3877 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer. 3878 * This callback may sleep. 3879 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags 3880 * This callback may sleep. 3881 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using 3882 * 4-address mode 3883 */ 3884 struct ieee80211_ops { 3885 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3886 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control, 3887 struct sk_buff *skb); 3888 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3889 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3890 #ifdef CONFIG_PM 3891 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan); 3892 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3893 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled); 3894 #endif 3895 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3896 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3897 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3898 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3899 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p); 3900 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3901 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3902 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed); 3903 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3904 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3905 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 3906 u32 changed); 3907 3908 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3909 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3910 3911 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3912 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list); 3913 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3914 unsigned int changed_flags, 3915 unsigned int *total_flags, 3916 u64 multicast); 3917 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3918 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3919 unsigned int filter_flags, 3920 unsigned int changed_flags); 3921 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3922 bool set); 3923 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd, 3924 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3925 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key); 3926 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3927 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3928 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf, 3929 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3930 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key); 3931 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3932 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3933 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data); 3934 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3935 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx); 3936 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3937 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req); 3938 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3939 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3940 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3941 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3942 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req, 3943 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies); 3944 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3945 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3946 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3947 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3948 const u8 *mac_addr); 3949 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3950 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3951 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3952 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats); 3953 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3954 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 3955 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 3956 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 3957 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 3958 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3959 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3960 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3961 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3962 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 3963 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3964 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3965 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3966 struct dentry *dir); 3967 #endif 3968 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3969 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3970 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3971 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3972 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3973 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3974 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3975 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state, 3976 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state); 3977 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3978 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3979 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3980 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3981 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3982 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3983 u32 changed); 3984 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3985 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3986 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3987 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3988 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3989 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3990 struct station_info *sinfo); 3991 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3992 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac, 3993 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params); 3994 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3995 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3996 u64 tsf); 3997 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3998 s64 offset); 3999 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4000 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4001 4002 /** 4003 * @ampdu_action: 4004 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action. 4005 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want 4006 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through 4007 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 4008 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver 4009 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size 4010 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the 4011 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be 4012 * possible with a buf_size of 8: 4013 * 4014 * - ``TX: 1.....7`` 4015 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1) 4016 * - ``TX: 8..1...`` 4017 * 4018 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the 4019 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be: 4020 * 4021 * - ``TX: 1 or`` 4022 * - ``TX: 18 or`` 4023 * - ``TX: 81`` 4024 * 4025 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again. 4026 * 4027 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return 4028 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START 4029 * if the session can start immediately. 4030 * 4031 * The callback can sleep. 4032 */ 4033 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4034 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4035 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params); 4036 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx, 4037 struct survey_info *survey); 4038 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4039 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class); 4040 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE 4041 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4042 void *data, int len); 4043 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, 4044 struct netlink_callback *cb, 4045 void *data, int len); 4046 #endif 4047 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4048 u32 queues, bool drop); 4049 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4050 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4051 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4052 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant); 4053 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant); 4054 4055 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4056 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4057 struct ieee80211_channel *chan, 4058 int duration, 4059 enum ieee80211_roc_type type); 4060 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4061 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4062 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx); 4063 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4064 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max); 4065 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4066 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4067 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask); 4068 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4069 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4070 const struct ieee80211_event *event); 4071 4072 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4073 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4074 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4075 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4076 bool more_data); 4077 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4078 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4079 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4080 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4081 bool more_data); 4082 4083 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4084 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset); 4085 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4086 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4087 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data); 4088 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4089 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4090 u32 sset, u8 *data); 4091 4092 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4093 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4094 u16 duration); 4095 4096 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4097 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4098 4099 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4100 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4101 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4102 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4103 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4104 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 4105 u32 changed); 4106 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4107 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4108 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4109 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4110 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4111 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4112 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4113 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 4114 int n_vifs, 4115 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 4116 4117 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4118 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type); 4119 4120 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6) 4121 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4122 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4123 struct inet6_dev *idev); 4124 #endif 4125 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4126 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4127 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4128 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4129 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4130 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4131 4132 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4133 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4134 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4135 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4136 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4137 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4138 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4139 4140 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4141 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4142 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4143 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4144 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4145 int *dbm); 4146 4147 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4148 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4149 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class, 4150 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 4151 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie); 4152 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4153 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4154 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4155 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4156 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4157 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params); 4158 4159 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4160 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 4161 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4162 4163 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4164 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4165 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf); 4166 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4167 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4168 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4169 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4170 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes); 4171 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4172 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4173 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func); 4174 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4175 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4176 u8 instance_id); 4177 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4178 struct sk_buff *head, 4179 struct sk_buff *skb); 4180 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4181 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4182 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats); 4183 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4184 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4185 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4186 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4187 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4188 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4189 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4190 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf); 4191 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4192 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4193 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids); 4194 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4195 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4196 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4197 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4198 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4199 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar); 4200 }; 4201 4202 /** 4203 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device 4204 * 4205 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4206 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4207 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4208 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4209 * @priv_data_len. 4210 * 4211 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4212 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4213 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device. 4214 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d) 4215 * 4216 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4217 */ 4218 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len, 4219 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops, 4220 const char *requested_name); 4221 4222 /** 4223 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device 4224 * 4225 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4226 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4227 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4228 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4229 * @priv_data_len. 4230 * 4231 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4232 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4233 * 4234 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4235 */ 4236 static inline 4237 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, 4238 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops) 4239 { 4240 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL); 4241 } 4242 4243 /** 4244 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device 4245 * 4246 * You must call this function before any other functions in 4247 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you 4248 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information. 4249 * 4250 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw() 4251 * 4252 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 4253 */ 4254 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4255 4256 /** 4257 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description 4258 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec 4259 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds 4260 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period) 4261 */ 4262 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink { 4263 int throughput; 4264 int blink_time; 4265 }; 4266 4267 /** 4268 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags 4269 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio 4270 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working 4271 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one 4272 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP 4273 */ 4274 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags { 4275 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0), 4276 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1), 4277 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2), 4278 }; 4279 4280 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4281 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4282 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4283 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4284 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4285 const char * 4286 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4287 unsigned int flags, 4288 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4289 unsigned int blink_table_len); 4290 #endif 4291 /** 4292 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED 4293 * 4294 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4295 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4296 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4297 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4298 * 4299 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4300 * 4301 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4302 */ 4303 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4304 { 4305 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4306 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw); 4307 #else 4308 return NULL; 4309 #endif 4310 } 4311 4312 /** 4313 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED 4314 * 4315 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4316 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4317 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4318 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4319 * 4320 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4321 * 4322 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4323 */ 4324 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4325 { 4326 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4327 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw); 4328 #else 4329 return NULL; 4330 #endif 4331 } 4332 4333 /** 4334 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED 4335 * 4336 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4337 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4338 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4339 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4340 * 4341 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4342 * 4343 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4344 */ 4345 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4346 { 4347 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4348 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw); 4349 #else 4350 return NULL; 4351 #endif 4352 } 4353 4354 /** 4355 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED 4356 * 4357 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4358 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4359 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4360 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4361 * 4362 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4363 * 4364 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4365 */ 4366 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4367 { 4368 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4369 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw); 4370 #else 4371 return NULL; 4372 #endif 4373 } 4374 4375 /** 4376 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger 4377 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for 4378 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags 4379 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput 4380 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table 4381 * 4382 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are 4383 * configured) or the name of the new trigger. 4384 * 4385 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw(). 4386 */ 4387 static inline const char * 4388 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags, 4389 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4390 unsigned int blink_table_len) 4391 { 4392 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4393 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table, 4394 blink_table_len); 4395 #else 4396 return NULL; 4397 #endif 4398 } 4399 4400 /** 4401 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device 4402 * 4403 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources 4404 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem. 4405 * 4406 * @hw: the hardware to unregister 4407 */ 4408 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4409 4410 /** 4411 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor 4412 * 4413 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the 4414 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw() 4415 * before calling this function. 4416 * 4417 * @hw: the hardware to free 4418 */ 4419 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4420 4421 /** 4422 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely 4423 * 4424 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason 4425 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state 4426 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware 4427 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by 4428 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all 4429 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function. 4430 * 4431 * @hw: the hardware to restart 4432 */ 4433 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4434 4435 /** 4436 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list 4437 * 4438 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4439 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4440 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4441 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4442 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4443 * 4444 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4445 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4446 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4447 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4448 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4449 * 4450 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock 4451 * 4452 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4453 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4454 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4455 * @list: the destination list 4456 */ 4457 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4458 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list); 4459 4460 /** 4461 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context 4462 * 4463 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4464 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4465 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4466 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4467 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4468 * 4469 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4470 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4471 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4472 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4473 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4474 * 4475 * This function must be called with BHs disabled. 4476 * 4477 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4478 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4479 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4480 * @napi: the NAPI context 4481 */ 4482 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4483 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi); 4484 4485 /** 4486 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame 4487 * 4488 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4489 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4490 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4491 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4492 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4493 * 4494 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4495 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4496 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4497 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4498 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4499 * 4500 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni(). 4501 * 4502 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4503 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4504 */ 4505 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb) 4506 { 4507 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL); 4508 } 4509 4510 /** 4511 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame 4512 * 4513 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context 4514 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 4515 * 4516 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not 4517 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with 4518 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4519 * 4520 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4521 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4522 */ 4523 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 4524 4525 /** 4526 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context) 4527 * 4528 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context 4529 * (internally disables bottom halves). 4530 * 4531 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may 4532 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4533 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4534 * 4535 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4536 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4537 */ 4538 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4539 struct sk_buff *skb) 4540 { 4541 local_bh_disable(); 4542 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb); 4543 local_bh_enable(); 4544 } 4545 4546 /** 4547 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta 4548 * 4549 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS 4550 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station 4551 * entering/leaving PS mode. 4552 * 4553 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled. 4554 * 4555 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against 4556 * each other. 4557 * 4558 * @sta: currently connected sta 4559 * @start: start or stop PS 4560 * 4561 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set. 4562 */ 4563 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start); 4564 4565 /** 4566 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta 4567 * (in process context) 4568 * 4569 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context 4570 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still 4571 * applies. 4572 * 4573 * @sta: currently connected sta 4574 * @start: start or stop PS 4575 * 4576 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(). 4577 */ 4578 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4579 bool start) 4580 { 4581 int ret; 4582 4583 local_bh_disable(); 4584 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start); 4585 local_bh_enable(); 4586 4587 return ret; 4588 } 4589 4590 /** 4591 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received 4592 * @sta: currently connected station 4593 * 4594 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4595 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a 4596 * connected station was received. 4597 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4598 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must 4599 * be serialized. 4600 */ 4601 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4602 4603 /** 4604 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received 4605 * @sta: currently connected station 4606 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame 4607 * 4608 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4609 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame 4610 * from a connected station was received. 4611 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4612 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be 4613 * serialized. 4614 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown. 4615 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC 4616 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper 4617 * checks. 4618 */ 4619 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 4620 4621 /* 4622 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions. 4623 * This is enough for the radiotap header. 4624 */ 4625 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4) 4626 4627 /** 4628 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames 4629 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station 4630 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames 4631 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID 4632 * 4633 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing 4634 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need 4635 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit. 4636 * 4637 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are 4638 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data 4639 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim 4640 * call! Beware of the locking!) 4641 * 4642 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD) 4643 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are 4644 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes 4645 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data, 4646 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered 4647 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP). 4648 * 4649 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per 4650 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since 4651 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the 4652 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that 4653 * use this API. 4654 */ 4655 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4656 u8 tid, bool buffered); 4657 4658 /** 4659 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet 4660 * 4661 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support 4662 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent 4663 * rate selection table for the station entry. 4664 * 4665 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4666 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent. 4667 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 4668 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information 4669 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch 4670 */ 4671 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4672 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4673 struct sk_buff *skb, 4674 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest, 4675 int max_rates); 4676 4677 /** 4678 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station 4679 * 4680 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput 4681 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can 4682 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station 4683 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic 4684 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause 4685 * slow stations to starve). 4686 * 4687 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for. 4688 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps. 4689 */ 4690 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 4691 u32 thr); 4692 4693 /** 4694 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback 4695 * 4696 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta 4697 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision 4698 * in updating the tx rate in data path. 4699 * 4700 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4701 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for. 4702 * @info: tx status information 4703 */ 4704 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4705 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 4706 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info); 4707 4708 /** 4709 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback 4710 * 4711 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been 4712 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for 4713 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics. 4714 * 4715 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4716 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls 4717 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() 4718 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4719 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni(). 4720 * 4721 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4722 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4723 */ 4724 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4725 struct sk_buff *skb); 4726 4727 /** 4728 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback 4729 * 4730 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 4731 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not 4732 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info. 4733 * 4734 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 4735 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 4736 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4737 * 4738 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4739 * @status: tx status information 4740 */ 4741 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4742 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status); 4743 4744 /** 4745 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb 4746 * 4747 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 4748 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to 4749 * specific skbs. 4750 * 4751 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 4752 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 4753 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4754 * 4755 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4756 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent 4757 * (NULL for multicast packets) 4758 * @info: tx status information 4759 */ 4760 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4761 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4762 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 4763 { 4764 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = { 4765 .sta = sta, 4766 .info = info, 4767 }; 4768 4769 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status); 4770 } 4771 4772 /** 4773 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context) 4774 * 4775 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context. 4776 * 4777 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 4778 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed 4779 * for a single hardware. 4780 * 4781 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4782 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4783 */ 4784 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4785 struct sk_buff *skb) 4786 { 4787 local_bh_disable(); 4788 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb); 4789 local_bh_enable(); 4790 } 4791 4792 /** 4793 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback 4794 * 4795 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context 4796 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 4797 * 4798 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 4799 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4800 * 4801 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4802 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4803 */ 4804 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4805 struct sk_buff *skb); 4806 4807 /** 4808 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format 4809 * 4810 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit 4811 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which 4812 * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap 4813 * 802.11 frames. 4814 * 4815 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4816 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all 4817 * calls in the same tx status family. 4818 * 4819 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4820 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted 4821 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4822 */ 4823 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4824 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4825 struct sk_buff *skb); 4826 4827 /** 4828 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station 4829 * 4830 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding 4831 * connected STA. 4832 * 4833 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta 4834 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response 4835 */ 4836 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets); 4837 4838 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2 4839 4840 /** 4841 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets 4842 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element 4843 * @tim_length: size of TIM element 4844 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets 4845 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which 4846 * should be ignored. 4847 */ 4848 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets { 4849 u16 tim_offset; 4850 u16 tim_length; 4851 4852 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM]; 4853 }; 4854 4855 /** 4856 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function 4857 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4858 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4859 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 4860 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 4861 * 4862 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 4863 * obtain the beacon template. 4864 * 4865 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the 4866 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template 4867 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when 4868 * applicable, the CSA count. 4869 * 4870 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 4871 * 4872 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 4873 */ 4874 struct sk_buff * 4875 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4876 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4877 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs); 4878 4879 /** 4880 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function 4881 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4882 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4883 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset. 4884 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 4885 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length, 4886 * (including the ID and length bytes!). 4887 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 4888 * 4889 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 4890 * obtain the beacon frame. 4891 * 4892 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 4893 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon 4894 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly 4895 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt). 4896 * 4897 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 4898 * 4899 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 4900 */ 4901 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4902 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4903 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length); 4904 4905 /** 4906 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function 4907 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4908 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4909 * 4910 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 4911 * 4912 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 4913 */ 4914 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4915 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 4916 { 4917 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL); 4918 } 4919 4920 /** 4921 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown 4922 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4923 * 4924 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission. 4925 * This function is called implicitly when 4926 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the 4927 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this 4928 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown. 4929 * 4930 * Return: new countdown value 4931 */ 4932 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4933 4934 /** 4935 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown 4936 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4937 * @counter: the new value for the counter 4938 * 4939 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be 4940 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211. 4941 * 4942 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(), 4943 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value. 4944 */ 4945 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter); 4946 4947 /** 4948 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch 4949 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4950 * 4951 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 4952 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 4953 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed. 4954 */ 4955 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4956 4957 /** 4958 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1 4959 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4960 * 4961 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero. 4962 */ 4963 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4964 4965 /** 4966 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template 4967 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4968 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4969 * 4970 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to 4971 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller. 4972 * 4973 * Can only be called in AP mode. 4974 * 4975 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error. 4976 */ 4977 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4978 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4979 4980 /** 4981 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template 4982 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4983 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4984 * 4985 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to 4986 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 4987 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used. 4988 * 4989 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 4990 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit. 4991 * 4992 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error. 4993 */ 4994 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4995 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4996 4997 /** 4998 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template 4999 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5000 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5001 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set 5002 * if at all possible 5003 * 5004 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to 5005 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5006 * BSSID and address is used. 5007 * 5008 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the 5009 * returned packet will be QoS NDP. 5010 * 5011 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5012 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields. 5013 * 5014 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error. 5015 */ 5016 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5017 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5018 bool qos_ok); 5019 5020 /** 5021 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5022 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5023 * @src_addr: source MAC address 5024 * @ssid: SSID buffer 5025 * @ssid_len: length of SSID 5026 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs 5027 * 5028 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5029 * hardware. 5030 * 5031 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5032 */ 5033 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5034 const u8 *src_addr, 5035 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len, 5036 size_t tailroom); 5037 5038 /** 5039 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function 5040 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5041 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5042 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5043 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5044 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5045 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame. 5046 * 5047 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5048 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5049 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5050 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed. 5051 */ 5052 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5053 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5054 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5055 struct ieee80211_rts *rts); 5056 5057 /** 5058 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame 5059 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5060 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5061 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5062 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5063 * 5064 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5065 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5066 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5067 * 5068 * Return: The duration. 5069 */ 5070 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5071 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len, 5072 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5073 5074 /** 5075 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function 5076 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5077 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5078 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5079 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5080 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5081 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame. 5082 * 5083 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5084 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5085 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5086 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed. 5087 */ 5088 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5089 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5090 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5091 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5092 struct ieee80211_cts *cts); 5093 5094 /** 5095 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame 5096 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5097 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5098 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5099 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5100 * 5101 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5102 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5103 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5104 * 5105 * Return: The duration. 5106 */ 5107 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5108 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5109 size_t frame_len, 5110 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5111 5112 /** 5113 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame 5114 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5115 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5116 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on 5117 * @frame_len: the length of the frame. 5118 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted. 5119 * 5120 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its 5121 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps). 5122 * 5123 * Return: The duration. 5124 */ 5125 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5126 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5127 enum nl80211_band band, 5128 size_t frame_len, 5129 struct ieee80211_rate *rate); 5130 5131 /** 5132 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames 5133 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5134 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5135 * 5136 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If 5137 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast 5138 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host 5139 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered 5140 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame. 5141 * 5142 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered 5143 * frames are available. 5144 * 5145 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was 5146 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus 5147 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns 5148 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver 5149 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to 5150 * use common code for all beacons. 5151 */ 5152 struct sk_buff * 5153 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5154 5155 /** 5156 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32 5157 * 5158 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32. 5159 * 5160 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5161 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5162 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5163 */ 5164 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5165 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5166 5167 /** 5168 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key 5169 * 5170 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken 5171 * from the given packet. 5172 * 5173 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5174 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted 5175 * with this P1K 5176 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5177 */ 5178 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5179 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k) 5180 { 5181 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data; 5182 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control); 5183 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]); 5184 5185 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k); 5186 } 5187 5188 /** 5189 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX 5190 * 5191 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32 5192 * and transmitter address. 5193 * 5194 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5195 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key 5196 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5197 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5198 */ 5199 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5200 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5201 5202 /** 5203 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key 5204 * 5205 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values 5206 * in the packet. 5207 * 5208 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5209 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be 5210 * encrypted with this key 5211 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes 5212 */ 5213 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5214 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k); 5215 5216 /** 5217 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos 5218 * 5219 * @pos: start of crypto header 5220 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5221 * @pn: PN to add 5222 * 5223 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of 5224 * the packet payload) 5225 * 5226 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should 5227 * point to the crypto header) 5228 */ 5229 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn); 5230 5231 /** 5232 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter 5233 * 5234 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5235 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5236 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5237 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5238 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data 5239 * 5240 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs 5241 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done 5242 * by the device and not by mac80211. 5243 * 5244 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5245 * can be done concurrently. 5246 */ 5247 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5248 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5249 5250 /** 5251 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter 5252 * 5253 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5254 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5255 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5256 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5257 * @seq: new sequence data 5258 * 5259 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the 5260 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK 5261 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called 5262 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211. 5263 * 5264 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5265 * can be done concurrently. 5266 */ 5267 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5268 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5269 5270 /** 5271 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key 5272 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5273 * 5274 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the 5275 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but 5276 * instead assumed to have been removed already. 5277 * 5278 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently) 5279 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().) 5280 */ 5281 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5282 5283 /** 5284 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN 5285 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on 5286 * @keyconf: new key data 5287 * 5288 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new 5289 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper 5290 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them. 5291 * 5292 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will 5293 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to 5294 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an 5295 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc. 5296 * 5297 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware 5298 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK 5299 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver 5300 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses 5301 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part 5302 * of the reconfiguration. 5303 * 5304 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq() 5305 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly. 5306 * 5307 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware, 5308 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases 5309 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for 5310 * the key that's being replaced. 5311 */ 5312 struct ieee80211_key_conf * 5313 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5314 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5315 5316 /** 5317 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying 5318 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on 5319 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association 5320 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying 5321 * @gfp: allocation flags 5322 */ 5323 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid, 5324 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp); 5325 5326 /** 5327 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key 5328 * 5329 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 5330 * at the same time. 5331 * 5332 * @keyconf: the key in question 5333 */ 5334 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5335 5336 /** 5337 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key 5338 * 5339 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 5340 * at the same time. 5341 * 5342 * @keyconf: the key in question 5343 */ 5344 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5345 5346 /** 5347 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue 5348 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5349 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5350 * 5351 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5352 */ 5353 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5354 5355 /** 5356 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue 5357 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5358 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5359 * 5360 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5361 */ 5362 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5363 5364 /** 5365 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue 5366 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5367 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5368 * 5369 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5370 * 5371 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise. 5372 */ 5373 5374 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5375 5376 /** 5377 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues 5378 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5379 * 5380 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5381 */ 5382 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5383 5384 /** 5385 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues 5386 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5387 * 5388 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5389 */ 5390 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5391 5392 /** 5393 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan 5394 * 5395 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is 5396 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify 5397 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from 5398 * any context, including hardirq context. 5399 * 5400 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan 5401 * @info: information about the completed scan 5402 */ 5403 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5404 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info); 5405 5406 /** 5407 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan 5408 * 5409 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the 5410 * driver whenever there are new scan results available. 5411 * 5412 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5413 */ 5414 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5415 5416 /** 5417 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped 5418 * 5419 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by 5420 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task. 5421 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan 5422 * while associating, for instance. 5423 * 5424 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5425 */ 5426 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5427 5428 /** 5429 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags 5430 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have 5431 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware 5432 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new 5433 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they 5434 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5435 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all 5436 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5437 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up). 5438 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA 5439 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery 5440 * for instance. 5441 */ 5442 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags { 5443 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0, 5444 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0), 5445 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1), 5446 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2), 5447 }; 5448 5449 /** 5450 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces 5451 * 5452 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5453 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as 5454 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep. 5455 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5456 * 5457 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5458 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5459 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5460 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5461 */ 5462 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5463 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5464 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5465 void *data); 5466 5467 /** 5468 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces 5469 * 5470 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5471 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5472 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 5473 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can 5474 * be used. 5475 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5476 * 5477 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5478 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5479 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5480 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5481 */ 5482 static inline void 5483 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5484 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5485 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5486 void *data) 5487 { 5488 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, 5489 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE, 5490 iterator, data); 5491 } 5492 5493 /** 5494 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces 5495 * 5496 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5497 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5498 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5499 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead. 5500 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5501 * 5502 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5503 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5504 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5505 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5506 */ 5507 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5508 u32 iter_flags, 5509 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5510 u8 *mac, 5511 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5512 void *data); 5513 5514 /** 5515 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces 5516 * 5517 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5518 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5519 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL. 5520 * 5521 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5522 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5523 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5524 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5525 */ 5526 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5527 u32 iter_flags, 5528 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5529 u8 *mac, 5530 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5531 void *data); 5532 5533 /** 5534 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations 5535 * 5536 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 5537 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 5538 * function for them. 5539 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5540 * 5541 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5542 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5543 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5544 */ 5545 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5546 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5547 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 5548 void *data); 5549 /** 5550 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5551 * 5552 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue. 5553 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be. 5554 * 5555 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5556 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue 5557 */ 5558 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work); 5559 5560 /** 5561 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5562 * 5563 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211 5564 * workqueue. 5565 * 5566 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5567 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue 5568 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing 5569 */ 5570 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5571 struct delayed_work *dwork, 5572 unsigned long delay); 5573 5574 /** 5575 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session. 5576 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 5577 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5578 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs) 5579 * 5580 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise 5581 * 5582 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 5583 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 5584 * will be managed by the mac80211. 5585 */ 5586 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, 5587 u16 timeout); 5588 5589 /** 5590 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate. 5591 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5592 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 5593 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5594 * 5595 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 5596 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called 5597 * from any context. 5598 */ 5599 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 5600 u16 tid); 5601 5602 /** 5603 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session. 5604 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop 5605 * @tid: the TID to stop BA. 5606 * 5607 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active 5608 * 5609 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 5610 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 5611 * will be managed by the mac80211. 5612 */ 5613 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid); 5614 5615 /** 5616 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate. 5617 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5618 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 5619 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on. 5620 * 5621 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 5622 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It 5623 * can be called from any context. 5624 */ 5625 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 5626 u16 tid); 5627 5628 /** 5629 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station 5630 * 5631 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on 5632 * @addr: station's address 5633 * 5634 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 5635 * 5636 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 5637 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 5638 */ 5639 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5640 const u8 *addr); 5641 5642 /** 5643 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware 5644 * 5645 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5646 * @addr: remote station's address 5647 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'. 5648 * 5649 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 5650 * 5651 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 5652 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 5653 * 5654 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get 5655 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'. 5656 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple 5657 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another 5658 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first). 5659 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL 5660 * is not reliable. 5661 * 5662 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible. 5663 */ 5664 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5665 const u8 *addr, 5666 const u8 *localaddr); 5667 5668 /** 5669 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up 5670 * @hw: the hardware 5671 * @pubsta: the station 5672 * @block: whether to block or unblock 5673 * 5674 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues 5675 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before 5676 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be 5677 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected 5678 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag. 5679 * 5680 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free 5681 * manner. 5682 * 5683 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames 5684 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not 5685 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call 5686 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to 5687 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the 5688 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must 5689 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will 5690 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if 5691 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also 5692 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver 5693 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after 5694 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually 5695 * woke up while blocked or not. 5696 */ 5697 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5698 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block); 5699 5700 /** 5701 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP 5702 * @pubsta: the station 5703 * 5704 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell 5705 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the 5706 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead. 5707 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD. 5708 * 5709 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must 5710 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function 5711 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or 5712 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix! 5713 * 5714 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no 5715 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if 5716 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history 5717 * and restore the _irqsafe version! 5718 */ 5719 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 5720 5721 /** 5722 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP 5723 * @pubsta: the station 5724 * @tid: the tid of the NDP 5725 * 5726 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close 5727 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when 5728 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window. 5729 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a 5730 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the 5731 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to 5732 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any 5733 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong. 5734 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame 5735 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save. 5736 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames(). 5737 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver 5738 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call 5739 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent. 5740 */ 5741 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid); 5742 5743 /** 5744 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid 5745 * 5746 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call 5747 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of 5748 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule 5749 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness. 5750 * 5751 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent 5752 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not 5753 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the 5754 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame 5755 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission 5756 * attempts. 5757 * 5758 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or 5759 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available. 5760 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of 5761 * them to 0. 5762 * 5763 * @pubsta: the station 5764 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for 5765 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec) 5766 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec) 5767 */ 5768 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 5769 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime); 5770 5771 /** 5772 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device 5773 * 5774 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5775 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 5776 * 5777 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can 5778 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false. 5779 */ 5780 bool 5781 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 5782 5783 /** 5784 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device 5785 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5786 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 5787 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 5788 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 5789 * 5790 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 5791 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 5792 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device 5793 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due 5794 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few 5795 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep. 5796 * 5797 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order 5798 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the 5799 * set_key callback. 5800 */ 5801 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5802 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5803 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5804 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5805 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5806 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 5807 void *data), 5808 void *iter_data); 5809 5810 /** 5811 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device 5812 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5813 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 5814 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 5815 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 5816 * 5817 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 5818 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 5819 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station 5820 * in removal process will be skipped. 5821 * 5822 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section, 5823 * and thus iter must be atomic. 5824 */ 5825 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5826 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5827 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5828 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5829 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5830 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 5831 void *data), 5832 void *iter_data); 5833 5834 /** 5835 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts 5836 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5837 * @iter: iterator function 5838 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 5839 * 5840 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and 5841 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other 5842 * places while calling into the driver. 5843 * 5844 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 5845 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 5846 * removed. 5847 * 5848 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 5849 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 5850 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 5851 * or not. 5852 */ 5853 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic( 5854 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5855 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5856 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 5857 void *data), 5858 void *iter_data); 5859 5860 /** 5861 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5862 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5863 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5864 * 5865 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5866 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate 5867 * information. This function must only be called from within the 5868 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function 5869 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return 5870 * %NULL. 5871 * 5872 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5873 */ 5874 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5875 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5876 5877 /** 5878 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons 5879 * 5880 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5881 * 5882 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and 5883 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the 5884 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function. 5885 */ 5886 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5887 5888 /** 5889 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP 5890 * 5891 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5892 * 5893 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and 5894 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver 5895 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost. 5896 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated 5897 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set. 5898 * 5899 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state, 5900 * without connection recovery attempts. 5901 */ 5902 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5903 5904 /** 5905 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection 5906 * 5907 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5908 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired 5909 * 5910 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a 5911 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired. 5912 */ 5913 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect); 5914 5915 /** 5916 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume 5917 * 5918 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5919 * 5920 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume. 5921 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the 5922 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were 5923 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or 5924 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume. 5925 * 5926 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses 5927 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface 5928 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then 5929 * disconnect normally later. 5930 * 5931 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and 5932 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it 5933 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the 5934 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto). 5935 */ 5936 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5937 5938 /** 5939 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring 5940 * rssi threshold triggered 5941 * 5942 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5943 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type 5944 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available 5945 * @gfp: context flags 5946 * 5947 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality 5948 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform 5949 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold. 5950 */ 5951 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5952 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event, 5953 s32 rssi_level, 5954 gfp_t gfp); 5955 5956 /** 5957 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss 5958 * 5959 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5960 * @gfp: context flags 5961 */ 5962 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp); 5963 5964 /** 5965 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected 5966 * 5967 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5968 */ 5969 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5970 5971 /** 5972 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process 5973 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5974 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not 5975 * 5976 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel 5977 * and wake up the suspended queues. 5978 */ 5979 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success); 5980 5981 /** 5982 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition 5983 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5984 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode 5985 * 5986 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed 5987 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than 5988 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth. 5989 */ 5990 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5991 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode); 5992 5993 /** 5994 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start 5995 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5996 */ 5997 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5998 5999 /** 6000 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired 6001 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6002 */ 6003 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6004 6005 /** 6006 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions 6007 * 6008 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device 6009 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba 6010 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs 6011 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)." 6012 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and 6013 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation. 6014 * 6015 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6016 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid 6017 * @addr: & to bssid mac address 6018 */ 6019 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap, 6020 const u8 *addr); 6021 6022 /** 6023 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered 6024 * @pubsta: station struct 6025 * @tid: the session's TID 6026 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are 6027 * assumed to be out of the window after the call 6028 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc. 6029 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware 6030 * 6031 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and 6032 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it 6033 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released 6034 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.) 6035 */ 6036 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6037 u16 ssn, u64 filtered, 6038 u16 received_mpdus); 6039 6040 /** 6041 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame 6042 * 6043 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder 6044 * buffer. 6045 * 6046 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6047 * @ra: the peer's destination address 6048 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session 6049 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver 6050 */ 6051 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn); 6052 6053 /** 6054 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work 6055 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6056 * @addr: station mac address 6057 * @tid: the rx tid 6058 */ 6059 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr, 6060 unsigned int tid); 6061 6062 /** 6063 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session 6064 * 6065 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6066 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6067 * reordering. 6068 * 6069 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6070 * when they complete AddBa negotiation. 6071 * 6072 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6073 * @addr: station mac address 6074 * @tid: the rx tid 6075 */ 6076 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6077 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6078 { 6079 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6080 return; 6081 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid); 6082 } 6083 6084 /** 6085 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session 6086 * 6087 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6088 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6089 * reordering. 6090 * 6091 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6092 * when they complete DelBa negotiation. 6093 * 6094 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6095 * @addr: station mac address 6096 * @tid: the rx tid 6097 */ 6098 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6099 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6100 { 6101 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6102 return; 6103 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS); 6104 } 6105 6106 /** 6107 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout 6108 * 6109 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx 6110 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer. 6111 * 6112 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa. 6113 * 6114 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6115 * @addr: station mac address 6116 * @tid: the rx tid 6117 */ 6118 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6119 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid); 6120 6121 /* Rate control API */ 6122 6123 /** 6124 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo 6125 * 6126 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for. 6127 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on. 6128 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration 6129 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs 6130 * to be filled in 6131 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate 6132 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and 6133 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network. 6134 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the 6135 * RTS threshold 6136 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission 6137 * if the selected rate supports it 6138 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask 6139 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use) 6140 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode 6141 */ 6142 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control { 6143 struct ieee80211_hw *hw; 6144 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband; 6145 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf; 6146 struct sk_buff *skb; 6147 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate; 6148 bool rts, short_preamble; 6149 u32 rate_idx_mask; 6150 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask; 6151 bool bss; 6152 }; 6153 6154 /** 6155 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities 6156 */ 6157 enum rate_control_capabilities { 6158 /** 6159 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: 6160 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable) 6161 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains 6162 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has, 6163 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us. 6164 */ 6165 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0), 6166 }; 6167 6168 struct rate_control_ops { 6169 unsigned long capa; 6170 const char *name; 6171 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6172 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv, 6173 struct dentry *debugfsdir); 6174 void (*free)(void *priv); 6175 6176 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp); 6177 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6178 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6179 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta); 6180 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6181 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6182 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6183 u32 changed); 6184 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6185 void *priv_sta); 6186 6187 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv, 6188 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6189 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st); 6190 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6191 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6192 struct sk_buff *skb); 6193 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6194 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc); 6195 6196 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta, 6197 struct dentry *dir); 6198 6199 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta); 6200 }; 6201 6202 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6203 enum nl80211_band band, 6204 int index) 6205 { 6206 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index)); 6207 } 6208 6209 static inline s8 6210 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6211 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6212 { 6213 int i; 6214 6215 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6216 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6217 return i; 6218 6219 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */ 6220 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 6221 6222 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */ 6223 return 0; 6224 } 6225 6226 static inline 6227 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6228 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6229 { 6230 unsigned int i; 6231 6232 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6233 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6234 return true; 6235 return false; 6236 } 6237 6238 /** 6239 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver 6240 * 6241 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass 6242 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station 6243 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on 6244 * the most recent rate control module decision. 6245 * 6246 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6247 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. 6248 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station. 6249 */ 6250 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6251 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 6252 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates); 6253 6254 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6255 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6256 6257 static inline bool 6258 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6259 { 6260 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20; 6261 } 6262 6263 static inline bool 6264 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6265 { 6266 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6267 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6268 } 6269 6270 static inline bool 6271 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6272 { 6273 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6274 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6275 } 6276 6277 static inline bool 6278 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6279 { 6280 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40; 6281 } 6282 6283 static inline bool 6284 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6285 { 6286 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) && 6287 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) && 6288 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT); 6289 } 6290 6291 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6292 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p) 6293 { 6294 if (p2p) { 6295 switch (type) { 6296 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION: 6297 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT; 6298 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP: 6299 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO; 6300 default: 6301 break; 6302 } 6303 } 6304 return type; 6305 } 6306 6307 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6308 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 6309 { 6310 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p); 6311 } 6312 6313 /** 6314 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data 6315 * 6316 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6317 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 6318 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 6319 * 6320 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and 6321 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the 6322 * matching GroupId management frame. 6323 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path. 6324 */ 6325 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6326 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position); 6327 6328 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6329 int rssi_min_thold, 6330 int rssi_max_thold); 6331 6332 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6333 6334 /** 6335 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface 6336 * 6337 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6338 * 6339 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid. 6340 * 6341 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not 6342 * applicable. 6343 */ 6344 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6345 6346 /** 6347 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup 6348 * @vif: virtual interface 6349 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s) 6350 * @gfp: allocation flags 6351 * 6352 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(). 6353 */ 6354 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6355 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup, 6356 gfp_t gfp); 6357 6358 /** 6359 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission 6360 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6361 * @vif: virtual interface 6362 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver 6363 * @band: the band to transmit on 6364 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to 6365 * 6366 * Note: must be called under RCU lock 6367 */ 6368 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6369 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb, 6370 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta); 6371 6372 /** 6373 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header 6374 * of injected frames 6375 * @skb: packet injected by userspace 6376 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 6377 */ 6378 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb, 6379 struct net_device *dev); 6380 6381 /** 6382 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state 6383 * 6384 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change 6385 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending 6386 * 6387 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent 6388 * 6389 * private: 6390 * 6391 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors 6392 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA 6393 */ 6394 struct ieee80211_noa_data { 6395 u32 next_tsf; 6396 bool has_next_tsf; 6397 6398 u8 absent; 6399 6400 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6401 struct { 6402 u32 start; 6403 u32 duration; 6404 u32 interval; 6405 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6406 }; 6407 6408 /** 6409 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE 6410 * 6411 * @attr: P2P NoA IE 6412 * @data: NoA tracking data 6413 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6414 * 6415 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors 6416 */ 6417 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr, 6418 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6419 6420 /** 6421 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change 6422 * 6423 * @data: NoA tracking data 6424 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6425 */ 6426 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6427 6428 /** 6429 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation 6430 * @vif: virtual interface 6431 * @peer: the peer's destination address 6432 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation 6433 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown 6434 * @gfp: allocation flags 6435 * 6436 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(). 6437 */ 6438 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer, 6439 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper, 6440 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp); 6441 6442 /** 6443 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID 6444 * 6445 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from 6446 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such 6447 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID, 6448 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks 6449 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be 6450 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC. 6451 * 6452 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it 6453 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should 6454 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6455 * 6456 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for 6457 * @tid: the TID to reserve 6458 * 6459 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure 6460 */ 6461 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6462 6463 /** 6464 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID 6465 * 6466 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function 6467 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for 6468 * preventing use of this TID in the driver. 6469 * 6470 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called 6471 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called 6472 * from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6473 * 6474 * @sta: the station 6475 * @tid: the TID to unreserve 6476 */ 6477 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6478 6479 /** 6480 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6481 * 6482 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6483 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6484 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6485 * 6486 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 6487 * 6488 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section, 6489 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in 6490 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the 6491 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call 6492 * but for the duration of the frame handling. 6493 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method, 6494 * rcu_read_lock() is already held. 6495 * 6496 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called. 6497 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead. 6498 */ 6499 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6500 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6501 6502 /** 6503 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6504 * (in process context) 6505 * 6506 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context 6507 * (internally disables bottom halves). 6508 * 6509 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6510 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6511 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6512 */ 6513 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6514 struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 6515 { 6516 struct sk_buff *skb; 6517 6518 local_bh_disable(); 6519 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq); 6520 local_bh_enable(); 6521 6522 return skb; 6523 } 6524 6525 /** 6526 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from 6527 * 6528 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6529 * @ac: AC number to return packets from. 6530 * 6531 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq 6532 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the 6533 * driver has finished scheduling it. 6534 */ 6535 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 6536 6537 /** 6538 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs 6539 * 6540 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6541 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for 6542 * 6543 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq(). 6544 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently. 6545 */ 6546 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 6547 6548 /* (deprecated) */ 6549 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac) 6550 { 6551 } 6552 6553 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6554 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force); 6555 6556 /** 6557 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission 6558 * 6559 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6560 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6561 * 6562 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled, 6563 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered. 6564 * 6565 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for 6566 * this TXQ internally. 6567 */ 6568 static inline void 6569 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 6570 { 6571 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true); 6572 } 6573 6574 /** 6575 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq() 6576 * 6577 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6578 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6579 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets. 6580 * 6581 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ 6582 * internally. 6583 */ 6584 static inline void 6585 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 6586 bool force) 6587 { 6588 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force); 6589 } 6590 6591 /** 6592 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit 6593 * 6594 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by 6595 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime 6596 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by 6597 * next_txq(). 6598 * 6599 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to 6600 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have 6601 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will 6602 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit 6603 * again. 6604 * 6605 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be 6606 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates 6607 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry 6608 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this 6609 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets 6610 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq(). 6611 * 6612 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6613 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6614 */ 6615 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6616 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6617 6618 /** 6619 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq 6620 * 6621 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e. 6622 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up 6623 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa. 6624 * 6625 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6626 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count 6627 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count 6628 */ 6629 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 6630 unsigned long *frame_cnt, 6631 unsigned long *byte_cnt); 6632 6633 /** 6634 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination. 6635 * 6636 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination. 6637 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 6638 * 6639 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6640 * @inst_id: the local instance id 6641 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*) 6642 * @gfp: allocation flags 6643 */ 6644 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6645 u8 inst_id, 6646 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason, 6647 gfp_t gfp); 6648 6649 /** 6650 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event. 6651 * 6652 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The 6653 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211. 6654 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 6655 * 6656 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6657 * @match: match event information 6658 * @gfp: allocation flags 6659 */ 6660 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6661 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match, 6662 gfp_t gfp); 6663 6664 /** 6665 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX. 6666 * 6667 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 6668 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length. 6669 * 6670 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6671 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate 6672 * information. 6673 * @len: frame length in bytes 6674 */ 6675 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6676 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 6677 int len); 6678 6679 /** 6680 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX. 6681 * 6682 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 6683 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length. 6684 * 6685 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6686 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 6687 * @len: frame length in bytes 6688 */ 6689 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6690 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, 6691 int len); 6692 /** 6693 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading. 6694 * 6695 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3 6696 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the 6697 * hardware or firmware. 6698 * 6699 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6700 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off 6701 */ 6702 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable); 6703 6704 /** 6705 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template. 6706 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6707 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6708 * 6709 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 6710 * 6711 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error. 6712 */ 6713 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6714 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6715 6716 /** 6717 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast 6718 * probe response template. 6719 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6720 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6721 * 6722 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 6723 * 6724 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error. 6725 */ 6726 struct sk_buff * 6727 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6728 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6729 #endif /* MAC80211_H */ 6730